Random Access Procedure in Multiple Transmission and Reception Points

ABSTRACT

A wireless device receives, via a first control resource set (coreset) with a first coreset group index, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-access procedure. A random-access preamble is transmitted for the random-access procedure. A downlink control information (DCI), scheduling a random-access response corresponding to the random-access preamble, is received via a second coreset with a second coreset group index. The DCI is received based on: a first transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the first coreset when the first coreset group index is the same as the second coreset group index, and a second TCI state of the second coreset when the first coreset group index is different from the second coreset group index.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of International Application No.PCT/US2020/044428, filed Jul. 31, 2020, which claims the benefits ofU.S. Provisional Application No. 62/880,880, filed Jul. 31, 2019, andU.S. Provisional Application No. 62/882,069, filed Aug. 2, 2019, theentire contents of each of which are hereby incorporated by reference intheir entireties.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present disclosureare described herein with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B illustrate example mobile communication networks inwhich embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.

FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user planeand control plane protocol stack.

FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocollayers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.

FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR userplane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.

FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.

FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logicalchannels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink anduplink.

FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.

FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into whichOFDM symbols are grouped.

FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time andfrequency domain for an NR carrier.

FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using threeconfigured BWPs for an NR carrier.

FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with twocomponent carriers.

FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may beconfigured into one or more PUCCH groups.

FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure andlocation.

FIG. 11B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the timeand frequency domains.

FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlinkand uplink beam management procedures.

FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-stepcontention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-freerandom access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for abandwidth part.

FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCItransmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.

FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communicationwith a base station.

FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 16C, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structuresfor uplink and downlink transmission.

FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a configuration of a transmissionconfiguration indication as per an aspect of an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 18 illustrates a random-access procedure as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 19 illustrates a random-access procedure as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 20 illustrates a random-access procedure as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 21 illustrates a flow diagram of a random-access procedure as peran aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 22 illustrates a random-access procedure as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 23 is a flow diagram of a random-access procedure as per an aspectof an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 24 illustrates a random-access procedure as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 25 is a flow diagram of a random-access procedure as per an aspectof an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 26 is a flow diagram of a random-access procedure as per an aspectof an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 27 is a flow diagram of a random-access procedure as per an aspectof an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 28 illustrates a random-access procedure as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 29 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 30 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

In the present disclosure, various embodiments are presented as examplesof how the disclosed techniques may be implemented and/or how thedisclosed techniques may be practiced in environments and scenarios. Itwill be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that variouschanges in form and detail can be made therein without departing fromthe scope. In fact, after reading the description, it will be apparentto one skilled in the relevant art how to implement alternativeembodiments. The present embodiments should not be limited by any of thedescribed exemplary embodiments. The embodiments of the presentdisclosure will be described with reference to the accompanyingdrawings. Limitations, features, and/or elements from the disclosedexample embodiments may be combined to create further embodiments withinthe scope of the disclosure. Any figures which highlight thefunctionality and advantages, are presented for example purposes only.The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible and configurable,such that it may be utilized in ways other than that shown. For example,the actions listed in any flowchart may be re-ordered or only optionallyused in some embodiments.

Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed. The disclosedmechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example,in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, acombination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may bebased, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network nodeconfigurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes,traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like.When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments maybe applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement exampleembodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.

A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wirelessdevices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/ormultiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have somespecific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/orcapability(ies). When this disclosure refers to a base stationcommunicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure mayrefer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area. Thisdisclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices ofa given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sectorof the base station. The plurality of wireless devices in thisdisclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/ora subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which performaccording to disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be aplurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in acoverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, forexample, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based onolder releases of LTE or 5G technology.

In this disclosure, “a” and “an” and similar phrases are to beinterpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” Similarly, any termthat ends with the suffix “(s)” is to be interpreted as “at least one”and “one or more.” In this disclosure, the term “may” is to beinterpreted as “may, for example.” In other words, the term “may” isindicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of oneof a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, beemployed by one or more of the various embodiments. The terms“comprises” and “consists of”, as used herein, enumerate one or morecomponents of the element being described. The term “comprises” isinterchangeable with “includes” and does not exclude unenumeratedcomponents from being included in the element being described. Bycontrast, “consists of” provides a complete enumeration of the one ormore components of the element being described. The term “based on”, asused herein, should be interpreted as “based at least in part on” ratherthan, for example, “based solely on”. The term “and/or” as used hereinrepresents any possible combination of enumerated elements. For example,“A, B, and/or C” may represent A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; or A,B, and C.

If A and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A iscalled a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets andsubsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B={cell1,cell2} are: {cell1}, {cell2}, and {cell1, cell2}. The phrase “based on”(or equally “based at least on”) is indicative that the phrase followingthe term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitablepossibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of thevarious embodiments. The phrase “in response to” (or equally “inresponse at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following thephrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitablepossibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of thevarious embodiments. The phrase “depending on” (or equally “depending atleast to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “dependingon” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities thatmay, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.The phrase “employing/using” (or equally “employing/using at least”) isindicative that the phrase following the phrase “employing/using” is anexample of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or maynot, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.

The term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether thedevice is in an operational or non-operational state. Configured mayrefer to specific settings in a device that effect the operationalcharacteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational ornon-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware,registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within adevice, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state,to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “acontrol message to cause in a device” may mean that a control messagehas parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics ormay be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether thedevice is in an operational or non-operational state.

In this disclosure, parameters (or equally called, fields, orInformation elements: IEs) may comprise one or more information objects,and an information object may comprise one or more other objects. Forexample, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter(IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprisesparameter (information element) J. Then, for example, N comprises K, andN comprises J. In an example embodiment, when one or more messagescomprise a plurality of parameters, it implies that a parameter in theplurality of parameters is in at least one of the one or more messages,but does not have to be in each of the one or more messages.

Many features presented are described as being optional through the useof “may” or the use of parentheses. For the sake of brevity andlegibility, the present disclosure does not explicitly recite each andevery permutation that may be obtained by choosing from the set ofoptional features. The present disclosure is to be interpreted asexplicitly disclosing all such permutations. For example, a systemdescribed as having three optional features may be embodied in sevenways, namely with just one of the three possible features, with any twoof the three possible features or with three of the three possiblefeatures.

Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may beimplemented as modules. A module is defined here as an element thatperforms a defined function and has a defined interface to otherelements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented inhardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g.hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, which maybe behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as asoftware routine written in a computer language configured to beexecuted by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic,Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink,Stateflow, GNU Octave, or Lab VIEWMathScript. It may be possible toimplement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete orprogrammable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples ofprogrammable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers,microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); fieldprogrammable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices(CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmedusing languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs andCPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL)such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog thatconfigure connections between internal hardware modules with lesserfunctionality on a programmable device. The mentioned technologies areoften used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.

FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 inwhich embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Themobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public landmobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG.1A, the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN)102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.

The CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to oneor more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet),private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interfacefunctionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between thewireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wirelessdevice 106, and provide charging functionality.

The RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 throughradio communications over an air interface. As part of the radiocommunications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resourcemanagement, and retransmission protocols. The communication directionfrom the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface isknown as the downlink and the communication direction from the wirelessdevice 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink.Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions usingfrequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD),and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.

The term wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to referto and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device forwhich wireless communication is needed or usable. For example, awireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer,laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (IoT) device,vehicle road side unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or anycombination thereof. The term wireless device encompasses otherterminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), accessterminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receiveunit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.

The RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown). The termbase station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to andencompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), anEvolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), aremote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one ormore RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coveragearea of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), aGeneration Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), anaccess point (AP, associated with, for example, WiFi or any othersuitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combinationthereof. A base station may comprise at least one gNB Central Unit(gNB-CU) and at least one a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).

A base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets ofantennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the airinterface. For example, one or more of the base stations may includethree sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors).The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver(e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive thetransmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter)operating in the cell. Together, the cells of the base stations mayprovide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographicarea to support wireless device mobility.

In addition to three-sector sites, other implementations of basestations are possible. For example, one or more of the base stations inthe RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less thanthree sectors. One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may beimplemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled toseveral remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay nodeused to extend the coverage area of a donor node. A baseband processingunit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RANarchitecture, where the baseband processing unit may be eithercentralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized. Arepeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from adonor node. A relay node may perform the same/similar functions as arepeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donornode to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radiosignal.

The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell basestations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-leveltransmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network.In heterogeneous networks, small cell base stations may be used toprovide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlapwith the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell basestations. The small coverage areas may be provided in areas with highdata traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocellcoverage. Examples of small cell base stations include, in order ofdecreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell basestations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.

The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 toprovide global standardization of specifications for mobilecommunication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100in FIG. 1A. To date, 3GPP has produced specifications for threegenerations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known asUniversal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation(4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation(5G) network known as 5G System (5GS). Embodiments of the presentdisclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network,referred to as next-generation RAN (NG-RAN). Embodiments may beapplicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as theRAN 104 in FIG. 1A, the RANs of earlier 3G and 4G networks, and those offuture networks yet to be specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6G network). NG-RANimplements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may beprovisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radioaccess technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies.

FIG. 1B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 inwhich embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Mobilecommunication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a networkoperator. As illustrated in FIG. 1B, mobile communication network 150includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented andoperate in the same or similar manner as corresponding componentsdescribed with respect to FIG. 1A.

The 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs,such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/orintra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the 5G-CN152 may set up end-to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one ormore DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality.Compared to the CN of a 3GPP 4G network, the basis of the 5G-CN 152 maybe a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of thenodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions thatoffer services via interfaces to other network functions. The networkfunctions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, includingas network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as softwareinstances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualizedfunctions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).

As illustrated in FIG. 1B, the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and MobilityManagement Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B,which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1B for ease ofillustration. The UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154and the one or more DNs. The UPF 158B may perform functions such aspacket routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policyrule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification tosupport routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality ofservice (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering,gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink trafficverification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notificationtriggering. The UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point forintra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an externalprotocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect tothe one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homedPDU session. The UEs 156 may be configured to receive services through aPDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.

The AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS)signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS)security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPPaccess networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g., control and executionof paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-systemand inter-system mobility support, access authentication, accessauthorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility managementcontrol (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/orsession management function (SMF) selection. NAS may refer to thefunctionality operating between a CN and a UE, and AS may refer to thefunctionality operating between the UE and a RAN.

The 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions thatare not shown in FIG. 1B for the sake of clarity. For example, the 5G-CN152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), anNR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a NetworkExposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an ApplicationFunction (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).

The NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radiocommunications over the air interface. The NG-RAN 154 may include one ormore gNB s, illustrated as gNB 160A and gNB 160B (collectively gNB s160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162). The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may bemore generically referred to as base stations. The gNB s 160 and ng-eNBs162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with theUEs 156 over an air interface. For example, one or more of the gNB s 160and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennasto respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells ofthe gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.

As shown in FIG. 1B, the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may beconnected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other basestations by an Xn interface. The NG and Xn interfaces may be establishedusing direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over anunderlying transport network, such as an Internet protocol (IP)transport network. The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connectedto the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface. For example, as illustratedin FIG. 1B, gNB 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uuinterface. The NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocolstack. The protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used bythe network elements in FIG. 1B to exchange data and signaling messagesand may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The userplane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane mayhandle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.

The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or moreAMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means ofone or more NG interfaces. For example, the gNB 160A may be connected tothe UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U)interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteeddelivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B. ThegNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Controlplane (NG-C) interface. The NG-C interface may provide, for example, NGinterface management, UE context management, UE mobility management,transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, andconfiguration transfer and/or warning message transmission.

The gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface. For example, thegNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocolterminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with afirst protocol stack. The ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTSTerrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRArefers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology. For example, the ng-eNB162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with asecond protocol stack.

The 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4Gradio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in theart that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in amode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-planefunctionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and paging). Althoughonly one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1B, one gNB or ng-eNB may beconnected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to loadshare across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.

As discussed, an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between thenetwork elements in FIG. 1B may be associated with a protocol stack thatthe network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages. Aprotocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane.The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the controlplane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.

FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user planeand NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that liesbetween a UE 210 and a gNB 220. The protocol stacks illustrated in FIG.2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uuinterface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown inFIG. 1B.

FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising fivelayers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220. At the bottom of theprotocol stack, physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transportservices to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspondto layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The nextfour protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access controllayers (MACs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223,packet data convergence protocol layers (PDCPs) 214 and 224, and servicedata application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, thesefour protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSImodel.

FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocollayers of the NR user plane protocol stack. Starting from the top ofFIG. 2A and FIG. 3, the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling.The UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be alogical connection between the UE 210 and a DN. The PDU session may haveone or more QoS flows. A UPF of a CN (e.g., the UPF 158B) may map IPpackets to the one or more QoS flows of the PDU session based on QoSrequirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, and/or error rate).The SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one ormore QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers. Themapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers maybe determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220. The SDAP 215 at the UE 210may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radiobearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received fromthe gNB 220. For reflective mapping, the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 maymark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may beobserved by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine themapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers.

The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression toreduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the airinterface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding ofdata transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (toensure control messages originate from intended sources. The PDCPs 214and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequencedelivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received induplicate due to, for example, an intra-gNB handover. The PDCPs 214 and224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of thepacket being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicatepackets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require highreliability.

Although not shown in FIG. 3, PDCPs 214 and 224 may performmapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in adual connectivity scenario. Dual connectivity is a technique that allowsa UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: amaster cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG). A split beareris when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers providedby the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, ishandled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs 214 and 224 maymap/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cellgroups.

The RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission throughAutomatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data unitsreceived from MACs 212 and 222, respectively. The RLCs 213 and 223 maysupport three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledgedmode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode anRLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the notedfunctions. The RLC configuration may be per logical channel with nodependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI)durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLCchannels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.

The MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logicalchannels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels.The multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexingof data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/fromTransport Blocks (TB s) delivered to/from the PHYs 211 and 221. The MAC222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling informationreporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamicscheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the gNB 220 (at the MAC 222)for downlink and uplink. The MACs 212 and 222 may be configured toperform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ)(e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)),priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means oflogical channel prioritization, and/or padding. The MACs 212 and 222 maysupport one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. In anexample, mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization maycontrol which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channelmay use. As shown in FIG. 3, the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logicalchannels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223.

The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels tophysical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions forsending and receiving information over the air interface. These digitaland analog signal processing functions may include, for example,coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation. The PHYs 211 and 221 mayperform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MACs 212and 222.

FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR userplane protocol stack. FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of threeIP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack togenerate two TB s at the gNB 220. An uplink data flow through the NRuser plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flowdepicted in FIG. 4A.

The downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives thethree IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packetsto radio bearers. In FIG. 4A, the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 toa first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer404. An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IPpacket. The data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to asa service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unitto/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit(PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG. 4A, the data unitfrom the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is aPDU of the SDAP 225.

The remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associatedfunctionality (e.g., with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers,and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer. Forexample, the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and cipheringand forward its output to the RLC 223. The RLC 223 may optionallyperform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) andforward its output to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex a number ofRLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form atransport block. In NR, the MAC subheaders may be distributed across theMAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A. In LTE, the MAC subheaders may beentirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU. The NR MAC PDUstructure may reduce processing time and associated latency because theMAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.

FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.The MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating thelength (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheadercorresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifyingthe logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in thedemultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDUlength field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.

FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into theMAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222. For example, FIG. 4Billustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU. MAC CEs may beinserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (asshown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions.MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling. Example MAC CEsinclude: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports andpower headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as thosefor activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel stateinformation (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS)transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception(DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access relatedMAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similarformat as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reservedvalue in the LCID field that indicates the type of control informationincluded in the MAC CE.

Before describing the NR control plane protocol stack, logical channels,transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well asa mapping between the channel types. One or more of the channels may beused to carry out functions associated with the NR control planeprotocol stack described later below.

FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, amapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physicalchannels. Information is passed through channels between the RLC, theMAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack. A logical channel may be usedbetween the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channelthat carries control and configuration information in the NR controlplane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane. Alogical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that isdedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may beused by more than one UE. A logical channel may also be defined by thetype of information it carries. The set of logical channels defined byNR include, for example:

-   -   a paging control channel (PCCH) for carrying paging messages        used to page a UE whose location is not known to the network on        a cell level;    -   a broadcast control channel (BCCH) for carrying system        information messages in the form of a master information block        (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIBs), wherein the        system information messages may be used by the UEs to obtain        information about how a cell is configured and how to operate        within the cell;    -   a common control channel (CCCH) for carrying control messages        together with random access;    -   a dedicated control channel (DCCH) for carrying control messages        to/from a specific the UE to configure the UE; and    -   a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) for carrying user data        to/from a specific the UE.

Transport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may bedefined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the airinterface. The set of transport channels defined by NR include, forexample:

-   -   a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that        originated from the PCCH;    -   a broadcast channel (BCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCCH;    -   a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) for carrying downlink data        and signaling messages, including the SIBs from the BCCH;    -   an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) for carrying uplink data and        signaling messages; and    -   a random access channel (RACH) for allowing a UE to contact the        network without any prior scheduling.

The PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processinglevels of the PHY. A physical channel may have an associated set oftime-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or moretransport channels. The PHY may generate control information to supportthe low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control informationto the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known asL1/L2 control channels. The set of physical channels and physicalcontrol channels defined by NR include, for example:

-   -   a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) for carrying the MIB from        the BCH;    -   a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) for carrying downlink        data and signaling messages from the DL-SCH, as well as paging        messages from the PCH;    -   a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for carrying        downlink control information (DCI), which may include downlink        scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power        control commands;    -   a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) for carrying uplink        data and signaling messages from the UL-SCH and in some        instances uplink control information (UCI) as described below;    -   a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) for carrying UCI,        which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality        indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank        indicators (RI), and scheduling requests (SR); and    -   a physical random access channel (PRACH) for random access.

Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generatesphysical signals to support the low-level operation of the physicallayer. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physical layer signalsdefined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondarysynchronization signals (SSS), channel state information referencesignals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), soundingreference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS).These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.

FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack. As shownin FIG. 2B, the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similarfirst four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack.These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221, the MACs 212and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224. Instead ofhaving the SDAPs 215 and 225 at the top of the stack as in the NR userplane protocol stack, the NR control plane stack has radio resourcecontrols (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top ofthe NR control plane protocol stack.

The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionalitybetween the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A) or, moregenerally, between the UE 210 and the CN. The NAS protocols 217 and 237may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is nodirect path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NASmessages can be transported. The NAS messages may be transported usingthe AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. NAS protocols 217 and 237 mayprovide control plane functionality such as authentication, security,connection setup, mobility management, and session management.

The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between theUE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and theRAN. The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionalitybetween the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred toas RRC messages. RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 andthe RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC,MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC may multiplex control-plane anduser-plane data into the same transport block (TB). The RRCs 216 and 226may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of systeminformation related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or theRAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection betweenthe UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management;establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radiobearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS managementfunctions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting;detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NASmessage transfer. As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRCs 216and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuringparameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.

FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE. TheUE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted inFIG. 1A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any otherwireless device described in the present disclosure. As illustrated inFIG. 6, a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g., RRC_IDLE), and RRCinactive 606 (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE).

In RRC connected 602, the UE has an established RRC context and may haveat least one RRC connection with a base station. The base station may besimilar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNB s 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted inFIG. 1B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other basestation described in the present disclosure. The base station with whichthe UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE. The RRCcontext, referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters forcommunication between the UE and the base station. These parameters mayinclude, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio linkconfiguration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g.,relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logicalchannel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/orPHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information. Whilein RRC connected 602, mobility of the UE may be managed by the RAN(e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154). The UE may measure the signallevels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell andneighboring cells and report these measurements to the base stationcurrently serving the UE. The UE's serving base station may request ahandover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on thereported measurements. The RRC state may transition from RRC connected602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRCinactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610.

In RRC idle 604, an RRC context may not be established for the UE. InRRC idle 604, the UE may not have an RRC connection with the basestation. While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for themajority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power). The UE may wakeup periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) tomonitor for paging messages from the RAN. Mobility of the UE may bemanaged by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection. The RRCstate may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through aconnection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a randomaccess procedure as discussed in greater detail below.

In RRC inactive 606, the RRC context previously established ismaintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fasttransition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead ascompared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602. Whilein RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of theUE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection. The RRC state maytransition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through aconnection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connectionrelease procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connectionrelease procedure 608.

An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism. InRRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606, mobility is managed by the UE throughcell reselection. The purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 andRRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE ofan event via a paging message without having to broadcast the pagingmessage over the entire mobile communications network. The mobilitymanagement mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allowthe network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the pagingmessage may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UEcurrently resides within instead of the entire mobile communicationnetwork. The mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRCinactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so usingdifferent granularities of grouping. For example, there may be threelevels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within aRAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within agroup of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by atracking area identifier (TAI).

Tracking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level. The CN(e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152) may provide the UE with a list ofTAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, throughcell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in thelist of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE mayperform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update theUE's location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.

RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level. For a UE in RRCinactive 606 state, the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area. ARAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a listof RAIs, or a list of TAIs. In an example, a base station may belong toone or more RAN notification areas. In an example, a cell may belong toone or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cellreselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification areaassigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update withthe RAN to update the UE's RAN notification area.

A base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving basestation of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station. Ananchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at leastduring a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area ofthe anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE staysin RRC inactive 606.

A gNB, such as gNBs 160 in FIG. 1B, may be split in two parts: a centralunit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU). A gNB-CU maybe coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface. The gNB-CU maycomprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP. A gNB-DU may comprise the RLC,the MAC, and the PHY.

In NR, the physical signals and physical channels (discussed withrespect to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto orthogonal frequencydivisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. OFDM is a multicarriercommunication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers(or tones). Before transmission, the data may be mapped to a series ofcomplex symbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) orM-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols), referred to as source symbols,and divided into F parallel symbol streams. The F parallel symbolstreams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain andused as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block thattransforms them into the time domain. The IFFT block may take in Fsource symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbolstreams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phaseof one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the Forthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT block may be Ftime-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonalsubcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol.After some processing (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix) andup-conversion, an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may betransmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency. The Fparallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before beingprocessed by the IFFT block. This operation produces Discrete FourierTransform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in theuplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR). Inverseprocessing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using anFFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.

FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into whichOFDM symbols are grouped. An NR frame may be identified by a systemframe number (SFN). The SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames. Asillustrated, one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration andmay include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. A subframe may bedivided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.

The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDMsymbols of the slot. In NR, a flexible numerology is supported toaccommodate different cell deployments (e.g., cells with carrierfrequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in themm-wave range). A numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrierspacing and cyclic prefix duration. For a numerology in NR, subcarrierspacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrierspacing of 15 kHz, and cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down bypowers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 μs. Forexample, NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrierspacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 μs; 30 kHz/2.3μs; 60 kHz/1.2 μs; 120 kHz/0.59 μs; and 240 kHz/0.29 μs.

A slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols).A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slotduration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe. FIG. 7illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration andslots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with asubcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease ofillustration). A subframe in NR may be used as a numerology-independenttime reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplinkand downlink transmissions are scheduled. To support low latency,scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start atany OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for atransmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to asmini-slot or subslot transmissions.

FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time andfrequency domain for an NR carrier. The slot includes resource elements(REs) and resource blocks (RBs). An RE is the smallest physical resourcein NR. An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrierin the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An RB spans twelveconsecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An NRcarrier may be limited to a width of 275 RBs or 275×12=3300 subcarriers.Such a limitation, if used, may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200,and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz,respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHzper carrier bandwidth limit.

FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entirebandwidth of the NR carrier. In other example configurations, multiplenumerologies may be supported on the same carrier.

NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for asubcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive thefull carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations). Also,receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UEpower consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or forother purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE's receive bandwidthbased on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This isreferred to as bandwidth adaptation.

NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable ofreceiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidthadaptation. In an example, a BWP may be defined by a subset ofcontiguous RBs on a carrier. A UE may be configured (e.g., via RRClayer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs perserving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPsper serving cell). At a given time, one or more of the configured BWPsfor a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referredto as active BWPs of the serving cell. When a serving cell is configuredwith a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or morefirst active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second activeBWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.

For unpaired spectra, a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlinkBWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplinkBWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP indexof the uplink BWP are the same. For unpaired spectra, a UE may expectthat a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a centerfrequency for an uplink BWP.

For a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primarycell (PCell), a base station may configure a UE with one or more controlresource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. A search spaceis a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE mayfind control information. The search space may be a UE-specific searchspace or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality ofUEs). For example, a base station may configure a UE with a commonsearch space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell (PSCell), in anactive downlink BWP.

For an uplink BWP in a set of configured uplink BWPs, a BS may configurea UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions.A UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) in adownlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrierspacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP. The UE maytransmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWPaccording to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing andcyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).

One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink ControlInformation (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicate whichBWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one ormore downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicatorfields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplinktransmissions.

A base station may semi-statically configure a UE with a defaultdownlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with aPCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP tothe UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP.The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP basedon a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.

A base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value fora PCell. The UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at anyappropriate time. For example, the UE may start or restart the BWPinactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DCI indicating an activedownlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectraoperation; or (b) when a UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlinkBWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWPfor an unpaired spectra operation. If the UE does not detect DCI duringan interval of time (e.g., 1 ms or 0.5 ms), the UE may run the BWPinactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero tothe BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivitytimer value to zero). When the BWP inactivity timer expires, the UE mayswitch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.

In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE withone or more BWPs. A UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to asecond BWP in response to receiving a DCI indicating the second BWP asan active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivitytimer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP).

Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers toswitching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) maybe performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra,downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously.Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DCI,expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of randomaccess.

FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using threeconfigured BWPs for an NR carrier. A UE configured with the three BWPsmay switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. In theexample illustrated in FIG. 9, the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with abandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with abandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP.The UE may switch between BWPs at switching points. In the example ofFIG. 9, the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switchingpoint 908. The switching at the switching point 908 may occur for anysuitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWPinactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or inresponse to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UEmay switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 inresponse receiving a DCI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP. The UEmay switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 inresponse to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in responsereceiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switchat a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in responsereceiving a DCI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP.

If a UE is configured for a secondary cell with a default downlink BWPin a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value, UE proceduresfor switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as thoseon a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and thedefault downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manneras the UE would use these values for a primary cell.

To provide for greater data rates, two or more carriers can beaggregated and simultaneously transmitted to/from the same UE usingcarrier aggregation (CA). The aggregated carriers in CA may be referredto as component carriers (CCs). When CA is used, there are a number ofserving cells for the UE, one for a CC. The CCs may have threeconfigurations in the frequency domain.

FIG. 10A illustrates the three CA configurations with two CCs. In theintraband, contiguous configuration 1002, the two CCs are aggregated inthe same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directlyadjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband,non-contiguous configuration 1004, the two CCs are aggregated in thesame frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in thefrequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration 1006, the twoCCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency bandB).

In an example, up to 32 CCs may be aggregated. The aggregated CCs mayhave the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/orduplexing schemes (TDD or FDD). A serving cell for a UE using CA mayhave a downlink CC. For FDD, one or more uplink CCs may be optionallyconfigured for a serving cell. The ability to aggregate more downlinkcarriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UEhas more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.

When CA is used, one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred toas a primary cell (PCell). The PCell may be the serving cell that the UEinitially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment,and/or handover. The PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobilityinformation and the security input. UEs may have different PCells. Inthe downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred toas the downlink primary CC (DL PCC). In the uplink, the carriercorresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC(UL PCC). The other aggregated cells for the UE may be referred to assecondary cells (SCells). In an example, the SCells may be configuredafter the PCell is configured for the UE. For example, an SCell may beconfigured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. In thedownlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as adownlink secondary CC (DL SCC). In the uplink, the carrier correspondingto the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC (UL SCC).

Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on,for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCellmay mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped andPUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. ConfiguredSCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect toFIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit perSCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells)for the UE are activated or deactivated. Configured SCells may bedeactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer(e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell).

Downlink control information, such as scheduling assignments andscheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cellcorresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known asself-scheduling. The DCI for the cell may be transmitted on anothercell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink controlinformation (e.g., HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, suchas CQI, PMI, and/or RI) for aggregated cells may be transmitted on thePUCCH of the PCell. For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs, thePUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided intomultiple PUCCH groups.

FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may beconfigured into one or more PUCCH groups. A PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCHgroup 1050 may include one or more downlink CCs, respectively. In theexample of FIG. 10B, the PUCCH group 1010 includes three downlink CCs: aPCell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013. The PUCCH group 1050includes three downlink CCs in the present example: a PCell 1051, anSCell 1052, and an SCell 1053. One or more uplink CCs may be configuredas a PCell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023. One or more otheruplink CCs may be configured as a primary Scell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell1062, and an SCell 1063. Uplink control information (UCI) related to thedownlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010, shown as UCI 1031, UCI 1032, andUCI 1033, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PCell 1021. Uplinkcontrol information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group1050, shown as UCI 1071, UCI 1072, and UCI 1073, may be transmitted inthe uplink of the PSCell 1061. In an example, if the aggregated cellsdepicted in FIG. 10B were not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 and thePUCCH group 1050, a single uplink PCell to transmit UCI relating to thedownlink CCs, and the PCell may become overloaded. By dividingtransmissions of UCI between the PCell 1021 and the PSCell 1061,overloading may be prevented.

A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier,may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index. The physicalcell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or anuplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context inwhich the physical cell ID is used. A physical cell ID may be determinedusing a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink componentcarrier. A cell index may be determined using RRC messages. In thedisclosure, a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, and acell index may be referred to as a carrier index. For example, when thedisclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlinkcarrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for acell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same/similar concept mayapply to, for example, a carrier activation. When the disclosureindicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may meanthat a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.

In CA, a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC. In anexample, a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell. A transport blockmay be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell. A transportblock and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may bemapped to a serving cell.

In the downlink, a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast,and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g.,PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A). In theuplink, the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g.,DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B). The PSS and the SSS maybe transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize theUE to the base station. The PSS and the SSS may be provided in asynchronization signal (SS)/physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block thatincludes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station mayperiodically transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks.

FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure andlocation. A burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBCHblocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may betransmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may berestricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a durationof 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG. 11A is an example, and thatthese parameters (number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity ofbursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on,for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block istransmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; aconfiguration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any othersuitable factor. In an example, the UE may assume a subcarrier spacingfor the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored,unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a differentsubcarrier spacing.

The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain(e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11A) and may spanone or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguoussubcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common centerfrequency. The PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may be transmitted after thePSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127subcarriers. The PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across thenext 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.

The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains maynot be known to the UE (e.g., if the UE is searching for the cell). Tofind and select the cell, the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. Forexample, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. Ifthe PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE maysearch for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier,as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at alocation in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, basedon a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS andthe PBCH, respectively. The SS/PBCH block may be a cell-defining SSblock (CD-SSB). In an example, a primary cell may be associated with aCD-SSB. The CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. In anexample, a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on theCD-SSB.

The SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or moreparameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physicalcell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS andthe SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frameboundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. Forexample, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted inaccordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in thetransmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.

The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction(FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by thePBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH. The PBCHmay include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of thecell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters mayfacilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station. The PBCHmay include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE withone or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the UE to locateremaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell.The RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1). The SIB1may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell. The UE mayuse one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCCH, which may beused to schedule PDSCH. The PDSCH may include the SIB1. The SIB1 may bedecoded using parameters provided in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate anabsence of SIB1. Based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1, theUE may be pointed to a frequency. The UE may search for an SS/PBCH blockat the frequency to which the UE is pointed.

The UE may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with asame SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g., having thesame/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay,and/or spatial Rx parameters). The UE may not assume QCL for SS/PBCHblock transmissions having different SS/PBCH block indices. SS/PBCHblocks (e.g., those within a half-frame) may be transmitted in spatialdirections (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of thecell). In an example, a first SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in afirst spatial direction using a first beam, and a second SS/PBCH blockmay be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam.

In an example, within a frequency span of a carrier, a base station maytransmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. In an example, a first PCI of afirst SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be differentfrom a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCHblocks. The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequencylocations may be different or the same.

The CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE toacquire channel state information (CSI). The base station may configurethe UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any othersuitable purpose. The base station may configure a UE with one or moreof the same/similar CSI-RSs. The UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs.The UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSIreport based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs. TheUE may provide the CSI report to the base station. The base station mayuse feedback provided by the UE (e.g., the estimated downlink channelstate) to perform link adaptation.

The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or moreCSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associated with alocation in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. The basestation may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource.The base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in theCSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.

The base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements. Thebase station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically,aperiodically, or semi-persistently. For periodic CSI reporting, the UEmay be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSIreports. For aperiodic CSI reporting, the base station may request a CSIreport. For example, the base station may command the UE to measure aconfigured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to themeasurements. For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station mayconfigure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate ordeactivate the periodic reporting. The base station may configure the UEwith a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling.

The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating,for example, up to 32 antenna ports. The UE may be configured to employthe same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set(CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed andresource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of thephysical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The UE maybe configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS andSS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatiallyQCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS areoutside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.

Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE forchannel estimation. For example, the downlink DMRS may be used forcoherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g.,PDSCH). An NR network may support one or more variable and/orconfigurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlinkDMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern. Afront-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., oneor two adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure the UE with a number (e.g. a maximum number) of front-loadedDMRS symbols for PDSCH. A DMRS configuration may support one or moreDMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration maysupport up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. Formultiuser-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonaldownlink DMRS ports per UE. A radio network may support (e.g., at leastfor CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein aDMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be thesame or different. The base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and acorresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix. The UE may use theone or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimationof the PDSCH.

In an example, a transmitter (e.g., a base station) may use a precodermatrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. For example, thetransmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and asecond precoder matrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrixand the second precoder matrix may be different based on the firstbandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The UE may assumethat a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs. The set ofPRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).

A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The UE may assume that at leastone symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers ofthe PDSCH. A higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.

Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE forphase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not maydepend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of thedownlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using acombination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or moreparameters employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and codingscheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamicpresence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCIparameters comprising at least MCS. An NR network may support aplurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequencydomains. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated withat least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume asame precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS portsmay be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency durationfor the UE. Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitatephase tracking at the receiver.

The UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channelestimation. For example, the base station may use the uplink DMRS forcoherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels. Forexample, the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to arange of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel.The base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRSconfigurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support afront-loaded DMRS pattern. The front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over oneor more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One ormore uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbolsof a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The base station may semi-staticallyconfigure the UE with a number (e.g. maximum number) of front-loadedDMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use toschedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS. An NR networkmay support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink,wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequencefor the DMRS may be the same or different.

A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit atleast one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layersof the PUSCH. In an example, a higher layer may configure up to threeDMRSs for the PUSCH.

Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase trackingand/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending onan RRC configuration of the UE. The presence and/or pattern of uplinkPT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRCsignaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes(e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated byDCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may beassociated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. Aradio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities definedin time/frequency domain. When present, a frequency domain density maybe associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. Anumber of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in ascheduled resource. For example, uplink PT-RS may be confined in thescheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.

SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel stateestimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or linkadaptation. SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station toestimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. A schedulerat the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state toassign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission fromthe UE. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with oneor more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station mayconfigure the UE with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource setapplicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter.For example, when a higher layer parameter indicates beam management, anSRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets(e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior, periodic, aperiodic,and/or the like) may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g.,simultaneously). The UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRSresource sets. An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/orsemi-persistent SRS transmissions. The UE may transmit SRS resourcesbased on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more triggertypes may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or moreDCI formats. In an example, at least one DCI format may be employed forthe UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resourcesets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on ahigher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRStriggered based on one or more DCI formats. In an example, when PUSCHand SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured totransmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplinkDMRS.

The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or moreSRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRSresource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domainbehavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication ofperiodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, mini-slot, and/orsubframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodicSRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a startingOFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hoppingbandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.

An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol onthe antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over whichanother symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symboland a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, thereceiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay,and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port,from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port. Afirst antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasico-located (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channelover which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may beinferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antennaport is conveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise atleast one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; anaverage gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx)parameters.

Channels that use beamforming require beam management. Beam managementmay comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication. Abeam may be associated with one or more reference signals. For example,a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals.The UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink referencesignals (e.g., a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS))and generate a beam measurement report. The UE may perform the downlinkbeam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a basestation.

FIG. 11B illustrates an example of channel state information referencesignals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. Asquare shown in FIG. 11B may span a resource block (RB) within abandwidth of a cell. A base station may transmit one or more RRCmessages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicatingone or more CSI-RSs. One or more of the following parameters may beconfigured by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling)for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configurationidentity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symboland resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframeconfiguration (e.g., subframe location, offset, and periodicity in aradio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, acode division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, atransmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g.,QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn-subframeconfiglist,csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resourceparameters.

The three beams illustrated in FIG. 11B may be configured for a UE in aUE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11B (beam#1, beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured. Beam#1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one ormore subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may be allocatedwith CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers inan RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 thatmay be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a thirdsymbol. By using frequency division multiplexing (FDM), a base stationmay use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are notused to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated witha beam for another UE. By using time domain multiplexing (TDM), beamsused for the UE may be configured such that beams for the UE use symbolsfrom beams of other UEs.

CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG. 11B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102,1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for oneor more measurements. For example, the UE may measure a reference signalreceived power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources. The base stationmay configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE mayreport the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or morebase stations) based on the reporting configuration. In an example, thebase station may determine, based on the reported measurement results,one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) statescomprising a number of reference signals. In an example, the basestation may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRCsignaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI). The UE may receive a downlinktransmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one ormore TCI states. In an example, the UE may or may not have a capabilityof beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beamcorrespondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of atransmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the correspondingRx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence,the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine thespatial domain filter of the Tx beam. The UE may perform the uplink beamselection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS)resources configured to the UE by the base station. The base station mayselect and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of theone or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE.

In a beam management procedure, a UE may assess (e.g., measure) achannel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair linkcomprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and areceiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE maytransmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pairquality parameters comprising, e.g., one or more beam identifications(e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, aprecoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI),and/or a rank indicator (RI).

FIG. 12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam managementprocedures: P1, P2, and P3. Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement ontransmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multipleTRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beamsand/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row,respectively, of P1). Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweepfor a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovalsrotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams(shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwisedirection indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure P2 may be used toenable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row ofP2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by thedashed arrow). The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or usingnarrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referredto as beam refinement. The UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beamdetermination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweepingan Rx beam at the UE.

FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam managementprocedures: U1, U2, and U3. Procedure U1 may be used to enable a basestation to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g., to support aselection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shownas ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1).Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set ofbeams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in aclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at thebase station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams(shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in acounter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure U2may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UEuses a fixed Tx beam. The UE and/or the base station may performprocedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1,or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may bereferred to as beam refinement The UE may perform procedure U3 to adjustits Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.

A UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based ondetecting a beam failure. The UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., apreamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like) based on theinitiating of the BFR procedure. The UE may detect the beam failurebased on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of anassociated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error ratehigher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower thana received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or thelike).

The UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or morereference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one ormore CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals(DMRSs). A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more ofa block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plusnoise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ)value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The base station mayindicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one ormore DM-RSs of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shared datachannel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or more DMRSs ofthe channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g., Dopplershift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rxparameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RSresource to the UE are similar or the same as the channelcharacteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.

A network (e.g., a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network) and/or the UE mayinitiate a random access procedure. A UE in an RRC_IDLE state and/or anRRC_INACTIVE state may initiate the random access procedure to request aconnection setup to a network. The UE may initiate the random accessprocedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state. The UE may initiate the randomaccess procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplinktransmission of an SR when there is no PUCCH resource available) and/oracquire uplink timing (e.g., when uplink synchronization status isnon-synchronized). The UE may initiate the random access procedure torequest one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other systeminformation such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The UE may initiatethe random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request. Anetwork may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or forestablishing time alignment for an SCell addition.

FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random accessprocedure. Prior to initiation of the procedure, a base station maytransmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE. The procedureillustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 11311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 3 1313, and a Msg 4 1314. The Msg 1 1311 mayinclude and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random accesspreamble). The Msg 2 1312 may include and/or be referred to as a randomaccess response (RAR).

The configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, usingone or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages may indicate oneor more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE. The one ormore RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: generalparameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g.,RACH-configGeneral); cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon);and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated). The basestation may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to oneor more UEs. The one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g.,dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED stateand/or in an RRC_INACTIVE state). The UE may determine, based on the oneor more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplinktransmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 3 1313.Based on the one or more RACH parameters, the UE may determine areception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 2 1312 andthe Msg 4 1314.

The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions availablefor transmission of the Msg 1 1311. The one or more PRACH occasions maybe predefined. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or moreavailable sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-ConfigIndex).The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a)one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals. Theone or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) oneor more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or morereference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs. For example, theone or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocksmapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to aSS/PBCH blocks.

The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311and/or Msg 3 1313. For example, the one or more RACH parameters mayindicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a receivedtarget power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission).There may be one or more power offsets indicated by the one or more RACHparameters. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: apower ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a poweroffset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313;and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one or moreRACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which theUE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/orCSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrierand/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).

The Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., apreamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions). An RRCmessage may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g.,group A and/or group B). A preamble group may comprise one or morepreambles. The UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathlossmeasurement and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. The UE may measure an RSRPof one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) anddetermine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRPthreshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS). The UEmay select at least one preamble associated with the one or morereference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if theassociation between the one or more preambles and the at least onereference signal is configured by an RRC message.

The UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACHparameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, theUE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRPmeasurement, and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. As another example, theone or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximumnumber of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds fordetermining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B). Abase station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UEwith an association between one or more preambles and one or morereference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). If the association isconfigured, the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311based on the association. The Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the basestation via one or more PRACH occasions. The UE may use one or morereference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of thepreamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion. One or more RACHparameters (e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMskIndex and/or ra-OccasionList) mayindicate an association between the PRACH occasions and the one or morereference signals.

The UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is receivedfollowing a preamble transmission. The UE may increase an uplinktransmit power for the preamble retransmission. The UE may select aninitial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or atarget received preamble power configured by the network. The UE maydetermine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmitpower. The UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g.,PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preambleretransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incrementalincrease in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The UE may rampup the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal(e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preambletransmission. The UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/orretransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The UE maydetermine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, forexample, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a thresholdconfigured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax).

The Msg 2 1312 received by the UE may include an RAR. In some scenarios,the Msg 2 1312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs.The Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmittingof the Msg 1 1311. The Msg 2 1312 may be scheduled on the DL-SCH andindicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The Msg 21312 may indicate that the Msg 1 1311 was received by the base station.The Msg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used bythe UE to adjust the UE's transmission timing, a scheduling grant fortransmission of the Msg 3 1313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI).After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312. The UE maydetermine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion thatthe UE uses to transmit the preamble. For example, the UE may start thetime window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble(e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preambletransmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on anumerology. The PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., aType1-PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message. The UEmay identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier(RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating therandom access procedure. The UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UEtransmits a preamble. For example, the UE may determine the RA-RNTIbased on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index;and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example ofRA-RNTI may be as follows:

RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id

where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion(e.g., 0≤s_id<14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACHoccasion in a system frame (e.g., 0≤t_id<80), f_id may be an index ofthe PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0≤f_id<8), andul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission(e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).

The UE may transmit the Msg 3 1313 in response to a successful receptionof the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 2 1312).The Msg 3 1313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example,the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A. Insome scenarios, a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to abase station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds toa UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR ascorresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g., using the Msg3 1313 and the Msg 4 1314) may be used to increase the likelihood thatthe UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE. Toperform contention resolution, the UE may include a device identifier inthe Msg 3 1313 (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in theMsg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).

The Msg 4 1314 may be received after or in response to the transmittingof the Msg 3 1313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 3 1313, the basestation will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE'sunique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure isdetermined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in theMsg 3 1313 (e.g., if the UE is in an RRC_IDLE state or not otherwiseconnected to the base station), Msg 4 1314 will be received using aDL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI. If a MAC PDU is successfully decodedand a MAC PDU comprises the UE contention resolution identity MAC CEthat matches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g.,transmitted) in Msg 3 1313, the UE may determine that the contentionresolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the randomaccess procedure is successfully completed.

The UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and anormal uplink (NUL) carrier. An initial access (e.g., random accessprocedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier. For example, a basestation may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: onefor an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier. For random accessin a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the network may indicate whichcarrier to use (NUL or SUL). The UE may determine the SUL carrier, forexample, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lowerthan a broadcast threshold. Uplink transmissions of the random accessprocedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 3 1313) may remain on theselected carrier. The UE may switch an uplink carrier during the randomaccess procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313) inone or more cases. For example, the UE may determine and/or switch anuplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 3 1313 based on achannel clear assessment (e.g., a listen-before-talk).

FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure.Similar to the four-step contention-based random access procedureillustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of theprocedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE. Theconfiguration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to theconfiguration message 1310. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13Bcomprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 2 1322.The Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 2 1322 may be analogous in some respects tothe Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 2 1312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively.As will be understood from FIGS. 13A and 13B, the contention-free randomaccess procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 3 1313and/or the Msg 4 1314.

The contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B maybe initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCelladdition, and/or handover. For example, a base station may indicate orassign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321. The UE mayreceive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of apreamble (e.g., ra-PreambleIndex).

After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR. In the event of abeam failure recovery request, the base station may configure the UEwith a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search spaceindicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceId). The UE maymonitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) onthe search space. In the contention-free random access procedureillustrated in FIG. 13B, the UE may determine that a random accessprocedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission ofMsg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322. The UE maydetermine that a random access procedure successfully completes, forexample, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. The UE maydetermine that a random access procedure successfully completes, forexample, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifiercorresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RARcomprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The UE maydetermine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SIrequest.

FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similarto the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a basestation may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit aconfiguration message 1330 to the UE. The configuration message 1330 maybe analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/orthe configuration message 1320. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13Ccomprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.

Msg A 1320 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE. Msg A1320 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/orone or more transmissions of a transport block 1342. The transport block1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to thecontents of the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A. The transport block1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like).The UE may receive the Msg B 1350 after or in response to transmittingthe Msg A 1320. The Msg B 1350 may comprise contents that are similarand/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., an RAR)illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 4 1314 illustrated inFIG. 13A.

The UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 13C forlicensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum. The UE may determine,based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step randomaccess procedure. The one or more factors may be: a radio accesstechnology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE hasvalid TA or not; a cell size; the UE's RRC state; a type of spectrum(e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.

The UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in theconfiguration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmitpower for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included inthe Msg A 1331. The RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and codingschemes (MCS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for thepreamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. A time-frequency resourcefor transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., a PRACH) and atime-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342(e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/or CDM. The RACHparameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and adownlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1350.

The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data),an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information(e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)). The basestation may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331. TheMsg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preambleidentifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplinkgrant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); a UE identifierfor contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI).The UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure issuccessfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 ismatched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier ofthe UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A1331 (e.g., the transport block 1342).

A UE and a base station may exchange control signaling. The controlsignaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and mayoriginate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g.,layer 2). The control signaling may comprise downlink control signalingtransmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink controlsignaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.

The downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink schedulingassignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resourcesand/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemptionindication; a power control command; and/or any other suitablesignaling. The UE may receive the downlink control signaling in apayload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink controlchannel (PDCCH). The payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred toas downlink control information (DCI). In some scenarios, the PDCCH maybe a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.

A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC)parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmissionerrors. When the DCI is intended for a UE (or a group of the UEs), thebase station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of theUE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC paritybits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusiveOR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits. Theidentifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporaryidentifier (RNTI).

DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated bythe type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. For example, aDCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) mayindicate paging information and/or a system information changenotification. The P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. ADCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI(SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the systeminformation. The SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. ADCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI)may indicate a random access response (RAR). A DCI having CRC paritybits scrambled with a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamicallyscheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-orderedrandom access. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporarycell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3analogous to the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A). Other RNTIsconfigured to the UE by a base station may comprise a ConfiguredScheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI(TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI),a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI(INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-PersistentCSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI(MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like.

Depending on the purpose and/or content of a DCI, the base station maytransmit the DCIs with one or more DCI formats. For example, DCI format0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 may bea fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 0_1may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCIpayloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for schedulingof PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g.,with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling ofPDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0). DCIformat 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a groupof UEs. DCI format 2_1 may be used for notifying a group of UEs of aphysical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume notransmission is intended to the UE. DCI format 2_2 may be used fortransmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH orPUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPCcommands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs. DCI format(s) for newfunctions may be defined in future releases. DCI formats may havedifferent DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.

After scrambling a DCI with a RNTI, the base station may process the DCIwith channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scramblingand/or QPSK modulation. A base station may map the coded and modulatedDCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH. Based on apayload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the base station, the basestation may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number ofcontiguous control channel elements (CCEs). The number of the contiguousCCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/orany other suitable number. A CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) ofresource-element groups (REGs). A REG may comprise a resource block inan OFDM symbol. The mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on theresource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g.,CCE-to-REG mapping).

FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for abandwidth part. The base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on oneor more control resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise atime-frequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using oneor more search spaces. The base station may configure a CORESET in thetime-frequency domain. In the example of FIG. 14A, a first CORESET 1401and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot. The firstCORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequencydomain. A third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot. Afourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETsmay have a different number of resource blocks in frequency domain.

FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCItransmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. The CCE-to-REG mappingmay be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providingfrequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for thepurposes of facilitating interference coordination and/orfrequency-selective transmission of control channels). The base stationmay perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs.A CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRCconfiguration. A CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasico-location (QCL) parameter. The antenna port QCL parameter may indicateQCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCHreception in the CORESET.

The base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprisingconfiguration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more searchspace sets. The configuration parameters may indicate an associationbetween a search space set and a CORESET. A search space set maycomprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs at a given aggregationlevel. The configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCCHcandidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoringperiodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats tobe monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a commonsearch space set or a UE-specific search space set. A set of CCEs in thecommon search space set may be predefined and known to the UE. A set ofCCEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on theUE's identity (e.g., C-RNTI).

As shown in FIG. 14B, the UE may determine a time-frequency resource fora CORESET based on RRC messages. The UE may determine a CCE-to-REGmapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mappingparameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of theCORESET. The UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of searchspace sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages. The UEmay monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configurationparameters of a search space set. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCHcandidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs.Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the setof the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats.Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCHcandidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (orconfigured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCHcandidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates inthe UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats.The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The UE may determinea DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambledbits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value). The UE mayprocess information contained in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment,an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlinkpreemption, and/or the like).

The UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., uplink controlinformation (UCI)) to a base station. The uplink control signaling maycomprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements forreceived DL-SCH transport blocks. The UE may transmit the HARQacknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplinkcontrol signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI)indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel. The UE maytransmit the CSI to the base station. The base station, based on thereceived CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g.,comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlinktransmission. Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests(SR). The UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is availablefor transmission to the base station. The UE may transmit a UCI (e.g.,HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via aphysical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink sharedchannel (PUSCH). The UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via aPUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.

There may be five PUCCH formats and the UE may determine a PUCCH formatbased on a size of the UCI (e.g., a number of uplink symbols of UCItransmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a lengthof one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE maytransmit UCI in a PUCCH resource using PUCCH format 0 if thetransmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACKinformation bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is oneor two. PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteenOFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may use PUCCHformat 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number ofHARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or twoOFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCHformat 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the numberof UCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number betweenfour and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. TheUE may use PUCCH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols,the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCCH resource does notinclude an orthogonal cover code. PUCCH format 4 may occupy a numberbetween four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than twobits. The UE may use PUCCH format 4 if the transmission is four or moresymbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCCH resourceincludes an orthogonal cover code.

The base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for aplurality of PUCCH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message. Theplurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets) may beconfigured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set may beconfigured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCHresources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resourceidentifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximumnumber) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of theplurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. When configuredwith a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may select one of theplurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCIinformation bits (e.g., HARQ-ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bitlength of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select afirst PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0”.If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two andless than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select asecond PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to“1”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than thefirst configured value and less than or equal to a second configuredvalue, the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCHresource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCIinformation bits is greater than the second configured value and lessthan or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406), the UE may select a fourthPUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3”.

After determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality of PUCCHresource sets, the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCHresource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission. The UE maydetermine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in aDCI (e.g., with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH. Athree-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eightPUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Based on the PUCCH resourceindicator, the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI and/or SR) using aPUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI.

FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 incommunication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments ofthe present disclosure. The wireless device 1502 and base station 1504may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobilecommunication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1A, the mobilecommunication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1B, or any othercommunication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one basestation 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood thata mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or morethan one base station, with the same or similar configuration as thoseshown in FIG. 15.

The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a corenetwork (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface(or radio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the basestation 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 isknown as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wirelessdevice 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known asthe uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplinktransmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the twoduplexing techniques.

In the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from thebase station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of thebase station 1504. The data may be provided to the processing system1508 by, for example, a core network. In the uplink, data to be sent tothe base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided tothe processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processingsystem 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 andlayer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer,for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.

After being processed by processing system 1508, the data to be sent tothe wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processingsystem 1510 of base station 1504. Similarly, after being processed bythe processing system 1518, the data to be sent to base station 1504 maybe provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wirelessdevice 1502. The transmission processing system 1510 and thetransmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A,FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For transmit processing, the PHY layer mayperform, for example, forward error correction coding of transportchannels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels tophysical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-inputmultiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.

At the base station 1504, a reception processing system 1512 may receivethe uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. At the wirelessdevice 1502, a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlinktransmission from base station 1504. The reception processing system1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A,FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For receive processing, the PHY layer mayperform, for example, error detection, forward error correctiondecoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physicalchannels, demodulation of physical channels, MIMO or multi-antennaprocessing, and/or the like.

As shown in FIG. 15, a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504may include multiple antennas. The multiple antennas may be used toperform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatialmultiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO),transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming. In other examples, thewireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a singleantenna.

The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may beassociated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readablemediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may beexecuted by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the presentapplication. Although not shown in FIG. 15, the transmission processingsystem 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the receptionprocessing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 maybe coupled to a memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computerreadable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that maybe executed to carry out one or more of their respectivefunctionalities.

The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 maycomprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The oneor more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, forexample, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP),a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), afield programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logicdevice, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardwarecomponents, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processingsystem 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least oneof signal coding/processing, data processing, power control,input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enablethe wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in awireless environment.

The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may beconnected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals1526, respectively. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or moreperipherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that providefeatures and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, akeypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver,a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequencymodulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, anelectronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or moresensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, aradar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, acamera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or theprocessing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provideuser output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one ormore peripherals 1526. The processing system 1518 in the wireless device1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured todistribute the power to the other components in the wireless device1502. The power source may comprise one or more sources of power, forexample, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combinationthereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527,respectively. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may beconfigured to provide geographic location information of the wirelessdevice 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively.

FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission. Abaseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel mayperform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise atleast one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generatecomplex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbolsonto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generatecomplex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mappingof precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation ofcomplex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division MultipleAccess (SC-FDMA) or CP-OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.In an example, when transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal foruplink transmission may be generated. In an example, when transformprecoding is not enabled, an CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmission maybe generated by FIG. 16A. These functions are illustrated as examplesand it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented invarious embodiments.

FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation andup-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The basebandsignal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for anantenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel(PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior totransmission.

FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions. Abaseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform oneor more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling ofcoded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel;modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulationsymbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one orseveral transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulationsymbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping ofcomplex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resourceelements; generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for anantenna port; and/or the like. These functions are illustrated asexamples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implementedin various embodiments.

FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation andup-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The basebandsignal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port.Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.

A wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages(e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a pluralityof cells (e.g. primary cell, secondary cell). The wireless device maycommunicate with at least one base station (e.g. two or more basestations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells. The one ormore messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) maycomprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers forconfiguring the wireless device. For example, the configurationparameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAClayer channels, bearers, etc. For example, the configuration parametersmay comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC,RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.

A timer may begin running once it is started and continue running untilit is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started if it is notrunning or restarted if it is running. A timer may be associated with avalue (e.g. the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may bestarted from zero and expire once it reaches the value). The duration ofa timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g.,due to BWP switching). A timer may be used to measure a timeperiod/window for a process. When the specification refers to animplementation and procedure related to one or more timers, it will beunderstood that there are multiple ways to implement the one or moretimers. For example, it will be understood that one or more of themultiple ways to implement a timer may be used to measure a timeperiod/window for the procedure. For example, a random access responsewindow timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving arandom access response. In an example, instead of starting and expiry ofa random access response window timer, the time difference between twotime stamps may be used. When a timer is restarted, a process formeasurement of time window may be restarted. Other exampleimplementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a timewindow.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, e.g., from a base station,a PDCCH order initiating a random-access procedure (e.g.,contention-free random-access procedure) for a cell (e.g., PCell,SCell). The wireless device may receive the PDCCH order via a coreset ofthe cell.

In an example, the base station may configure, by RRC, the coreset witha TCI state indicating a reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS, SSB). In anexample, the base station may activate, by MAC CE, the coreset with aTCI state indicating a reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS, SSB). Thereference signal may be a downlink reference signal.

In an example, based on the receiving the PDCCH order, the wirelessdevice may transmit a random-access preamble for the random-accessprocedure.

In an example, based on the transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may start monitoring for a PDCCH scheduling/indicating arandom-access response. The PDCCH may comprise a DCI (e.g., DCI format1_0) with a CRC scrambled by a RA-RNTI. In existing systems, thewireless device may receive the PDCCH scheduling/indicating therandom-access response based on the reference signal indicated by theTCI state of the coreset that the PDCCH order is received. In anexample, the wireless device may receive the PDCCH scheduling/indicatingthe random-access response via a second coreset of the cell. In anexample, the second coreset and the coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived may be the same. In an example, the second coreset and thecoreset that the PDCCH order is received may be different.

In an example, a wireless device may be served by a plurality of TRPs.The wireless device may receive/transmit via the plurality of TRPs. ATRP of the plurality of TRPs may be associated with a coreset groupcomprising one or more coresets. In an example, a TRP associated with acoreset group may transmit via the one or more coresets of the coresetgroup. In an example, a TRP not associated with a coreset group may nottransmit via the one or more coresets of the coreset group.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a PDCCH order, via afirst coreset in a first coreset group associated with a first TRP,indicating a random-access procedure. In an example, the base stationmay configure (e.g., by RRC) or activate (e.g., by MAC CE) the firstcoreset with a TCI state indicating a reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS,SSB). The wireless device may transmit a random-access preamble for therandom-access procedure. In an example, based on the transmitting therandom-access preamble, the wireless device may start, for a PDCCHscheduling/indicating a random-access response, monitoring a secondcoreset in a second coreset group associated with a second TRP.

Existing PDCCH reception techniques for the PDCCH scheduling/indicatingthe random access response may be inefficient when the wireless devicereceives the PDCCH order via the first coreset group and the PDCCHscheduling/indicating the random-access response via the second coresetgroup that is different from the first coreset group. For example, thefirst TRP and the second TRP may use different beams (or referencesignals) to serve (or transmit to) the wireless device. The wirelessdevice may not receive a downlink signal (e.g., PDCCH) via the secondcoreset in the second coreset group based on a reference signal (or abeam) indicated by a TCI state of the first coreset in the first coresetgroup. In an example, the wireless device may not receive the PDCCHscheduling/indicating the random-access response via the second coresetbased on the first and second TRP using different beams. In an example,the wireless device may receive the PDCCH scheduling/indicating therandom-access response via the second coreset with an error based on thefirst and second TRP using different beams. This may lead to one or moreretransmissions of the PDCCH scheduling/indicating the random-accessresponse, resulting in increased power consumption at the base stationdue to retransmission, increased power/battery consumption at thewireless device due to an increased monitoring duration, and increasedlatency for the random-access procedure.

Example embodiments implement an enhanced procedure for receiving aPDCCH indicating/scheduling a random-access response when the wirelessdevice receives a PDCCH order, initiating a random-access procedure, viaa first coreset in a first coreset group and the random-access responsevia a second coreset in a second coreset group that is different fromthe first coreset group. In an example, the base station mayconfigure/activate the second coreset with a second TCI state indicatinga second reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS, SSB). The second coreset may beassociated with a search space set (e.g., Type1 CSS, ra-search spaceset, etc.). In an embodiment, the wireless device may receive the PDCCHindicating/scheduling a random-access response based on the secondreference signal of the second coreset. In another embodiment, the basestation may transmit the PDCCH indicating/scheduling the random-accessresponse via a second coreset of the first coreset group that the PDCCHorder is received. The base station may not transmit the PDCCHindicating/scheduling the random-access response via a second coreset ofa second coreset group that is different from the first coreset groupthat the wireless device receives the PDCCH order.

This enhanced process improves power control signaling, reduces uplinkoverhead/retransmissions and interference, reduces wireless device andbase station power consumption, and reduces delay/latency ofrandom-access procedure.

FIG. 17 shows an example of a TCI state information element (IE) for adownlink beam management as per an aspect of an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more TCI states by a higher layer parameter PDSCH-Config for aserving cell (e.g., PCell, SCell). In an example, the wireless devicemay detect a PDCCH with a DCI for the serving cell. The wireless devicemay use the one or more TCI states to decode a PDSCH scheduled by thePDCCH. The DCI may be intended for the wireless device and/or theserving cell of the wireless device.

In an example, a TCI state of the one or more TCI state may comprise oneor more parameters (e.g., qcl-Type1, qcl-Type2, reference Signal, etc.).In an example, the TCI state may be identified by a TCI state index(e.g., tci-StateId in FIG. 17). The wireless device may use the one ormore parameters in the TCI state to configure one or more quasico-location relationships between at least one downlink reference signal(e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) and DM-RS ports of the PDSCH. In FIG. 17,a first quasi co-location relationship of the one or more quasico-location relationships may be configured by a higher layer parameterqcl-Type1 for a first DL RS (e.g., indicated by the reference Signal inFIG. 17) of the at least one downlink reference signal. In FIG. 17, asecond quasi co-location relationship of the one or more quasico-location relationships may be configured by a higher layer parameterqcl-Type2 for, if configured, a second DL RS (e.g., indicated by thereference Signal in FIG. 17) of the at least one downlink referencesignal.

In an example, at least one quasi co-location type of the at least onedownlink reference signal (e.g., the first DL RS, the second DL RS) maybe provided to the wireless device by a higher layer parameter qcl-Typein QCL-Info in FIG. 17. In an example, when at least two quasico-location relationships, comprising a first QCL type and a second QCLtype, between at least two downlink reference signals and DM-RS ports ofa PDSCH are configured, the first QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeB)of a first DL RS of the at least two downlink reference signals and thesecond QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeC, QCL-TypeD) of a second DL RS of the atleast two downlink reference signals may not be the same. In an example,the first DL RS and the second DL RS may be the same. In an example, thefirst DL RS and the second DL RS may be different.

FIG. 18 is an example of a random-access procedure as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more messages. In anexample, the wireless device may receive the one or more messages from abase station. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise physical random-access channel (PRACH) transmission parameters(e.g., PRACH preamble format, time resources, and frequency resourcesfor PRACH transmission). The one or more configuration parameters may befor a cell (e.g., cell in FIG. 18). In an example, the PRACHtransmission parameters may be (configured/indicated) for a PRACHtransmission via/of the cell. In an example, the PRACH transmissionparameters may be (configured/indicated) for a random-access procedurefor the cell. The cell may be a primary cell (PCell). The cell may be asecondary cell (SCell). The cell may be a secondary cell configured withPUCCH (e.g., PUCCH SCell). In an example, the cell may be an unlicensedcell. In an example, the cell may be a licensed cell.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate oneor more control resource sets (coresets) for the cell. In an example,the one or more coresets may comprise a first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1in FIG. 18). In an example, the one or more coresets may comprise asecond coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 in FIG. 18).

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatecoreset indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterControlResourceSetId) for the one or more coresets. In an example, eachcoreset of the one or more coresets may be identified by a respectivecoreset index of the coreset indices. In an example, the first coresetmay be identified by a first coreset index of the coreset indices. In anexample, the second coreset may be identified by a second coreset indexof the coreset indices.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate oneor more search space sets for a downlink BWP of the cell (e.g., by ahigher layer parameter SearchSpace). In an example, the one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate one or more search space sets forthe cell (e.g., by a higher layer parameter SearchSpace).

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatesearch space set indices for the one or more search space sets (e.g.,provided by a higher layer parameter searchSpaceId). In an example, eachsearch space set of the one or more search space sets may be identifiedby a respective search space set index of the search space set indices.In an example, a first search space set of the one or more search spacesets may be identified by a first search space set index of the searchspace set indices. In an example, a second search space set of the oneor more search space sets may be identified by a second search space setindex of the search space set indices.

In an example, a search space set of the one or more search space setsmay be associated with (or linked to) a coreset of the one or morecoresets. In an example, the one or more configuration parameters mayindicate the coreset (or a coreset index of the coreset) for the searchspace set (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametercontrolResourceSetId in the higher layer parameter SearchSpace). In anexample, the association (or the linkage) may be one-to-one. The beingone-to-one may comprise that the search space set associated with (orlinked to) the coreset may not be associated (or linked to) a secondcoreset that is different from the coreset.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate thecoreset indices for the one or more search space sets (e.g., provided bya higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId in the higher layerparameter SearchSpace). In an example, each search space set of the oneor more search space sets may be associated with (or linked to) acoreset, of the one or more coresets, identified by a respective coresetindex of the coreset indices. In an example, the one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the first coreset index of thefirst coreset for the first search space set. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the first coreset index of thefirst coreset in a first coreset index field (e.g., provided by a higherlayer parameter controlResourceSetId in the higher layer parameterSearchSpace) of the first search space set. Based on the one or moreconfiguration parameters indicating the first coreset index of the firstcoreset for the first search space set, the first search space set maybe associated with (or linked to) the first coreset. In an example, theone or more configuration parameters may indicate the first coresetindex of the first coreset for the second search space set. The one ormore configuration parameters may indicate the first coreset index ofthe first coreset in a second coreset index field (e.g., provided by ahigher layer parameter controlResourceSetId in the higher layerparameter SearchSpace) of the second search space set. Based on the oneor more configuration parameters indicating the first coreset index ofthe first coreset for the second search space set, the second searchspace set may be associated with (or linked to) the first coreset. In anexample, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate thesecond coreset index of the second coreset for the first search spaceset. Based on the one or more configuration parameters indicating thesecond coreset index of the second coreset for the first search spaceset, the first search space set may be associated with (or linked to)the second coreset. In an example, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate the second coreset index of the second coresetfor the second search space set. Based on the one or more configurationparameters indicating the second coreset index of the second coreset forthe second search space set, the second search space set may beassociated with (or linked to) the second coreset.

In an example, based on the search space set being associated with (orlinked to) the coreset, the wireless device may monitor PDCCHcandidates, for a downlink control signal/channel (e.g., DCI, PDCCH, RS,GC-PDCCH, DMRS, etc.), in PDCCH monitoring occasions for the searchspace set associated with (or linked to) the coreset. In an example,based on the search space set being associated with (or linked to) thecoreset, the wireless device may monitor PDCCH candidates, for a DCI, inPDCCH monitoring occasions for the search space set in the coresetassociated with (or linked to) the search space set. In an example,based on the search space set being associated with (or linked to) thecoreset, the wireless device may monitor, for a DCI, a PDCCH for thesearch space set in the coreset associated with (or linked to) thesearch space set.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for DCI(s), PDCCH(s) viathe one or more coresets based on one or more antenna port quasico-location properties (e.g., DM-RS antenna port quasi co-locationproperty, for example Antenna port QCL property 1, Antenna port QCLproperty 2 in FIG. 18). In an example, the wireless device mayreceive/detect the PDCCH(s) comprising the DCI(s), via the one or morecoresets, based on the one or more antenna port quasi co-locationproperties. In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect aPDCCH comprising a DCI, via each coreset of the one or more coresets,based on a respective antenna port quasi co-location property of the oneor more antenna port quasi co-location properties. In an example,receiving/detecting a PDCCH, via a coreset of the one or more coresets,based on an antenna port quasi co-location property of the one or moreantenna port quasi co-location properties may comprise that at least oneDM-RS port of the PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a referencesignal indicated by (or in) the antenna port quasi co-location property.The antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thereference signal (e.g., RS 1 for Coreset 1, RS 2 for Coreset 2 in FIG.18). The antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate areference signal index (e.g., ssb-index, csi-rs index, etc.) of thereference signal. The at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect to at leastone of: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, andspatial RX parameters. The at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may bequasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect to aquasi co-location type (e.g., QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeB, QCL-TypeC,QCL-TypeD). The antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the quasi co-location type. The antenna port quasico-location property may comprise/indicate the quasi co-location typefor the reference signal. In an example, when the at least one DM-RSport of the PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signalwith respect QCL-TypeA, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may bequasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect toDoppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay and delay spread. In anexample, when the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect QCL-TypeB,the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may be quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect to Doppler shift andDoppler spread. In an example, when the at least one DM-RS port of thePDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal withrespect QCL-TypeC, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect to Dopplershift and average delay. In an example, when the at least one DM-RS portof the PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal withrespect QCL-TypeD, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect to spatial RXparameters.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset based on a first antenna port quasico-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 1 in FIG. 18) ofthe one or more antenna port quasi co-location properties. In anexample, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI, via the first coreset, based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving/detecting (ormonitoring) the first PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that (the wirelessdevice determines that) at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCHis quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a first reference signal (e.g., RS 1in FIG. 18) indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasico-location property. The receiving/detecting the first PDCCH in/via thefirst coreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-location propertymay comprise that (the wireless device determines that) at least onefirst DM-RS port of/for a reception of the first PDCCH is quasico-located (QCL-ed) with a first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG.18) indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH may beQCL-ed with the first reference signal with respect to a first quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type. The first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type for the firstreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a second DCI, asecond PDCCH in/via the second coreset based on a second antenna portquasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 2 in FIG.18) of the one or more antenna port quasi co-location properties. In anexample, the wireless device may receive/detect the second PDCCHcomprising the second DCI, via the second coreset, based on the secondantenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving/detecting (ormonitoring) the second PDCCH in/via the second coreset based on thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that (thewireless device determines that) at least one second DM-RS port of thesecond PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a second reference signal(e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 18) indicated by (or in) the second antenna portquasi co-location property. The receiving/detecting the second PDCCHin/via the second coreset based on the second antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that (the wireless device determinesthat) at least one second DM-RS port of/for a reception of the secondPDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a second reference signal (e.g.,RS 2 in FIG. 18) indicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasico-location property. The at least one second DM-RS port of the secondPDCCH may be QCL-ed with the second reference signal with respect to asecond quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). Thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thesecond quasi co-location type. The second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type for thesecond reference signal.

In an example, the first antenna port quasi co-location property and thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may be the same. In anexample, the first antenna port quasi co-location property and thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may be different.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate oneor more transmission configuration indicator (TCI) states for the one ormore coresets. In an example, the one or more TCI states may compriseone or more first TCI states for the first coreset. The one or more TCIstates may comprise one or more second TCI states for the secondcoreset.

In an example, the wireless device may receive one or more MAC CEs(e.g., TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE) activating oneor more activated TCI states of the one or more TCI states for the oneor more coresets. In an example, each of the one or more MAC CEs mayactivate a respective TCI state for a respective coreset of the one ormore coresets. In an example, the wireless device may activate/use eachTCI state of the one or more activated TCI states for a respectivecoreset of the one or more coresets. In an example, the wireless devicemay activate/use each TCI state of the one or more activated TCI statesfor a (single, only one) coreset of the one or more coresets. In anexample, the (activated) one or more activated TCI states may beapplicable to PDCCH reception (in the one or more coresets) in an activedownlink BWP of the cell.

In an example, each TCI state of the one or more activated TCI statesmay comprise/indicate a respective antenna port quasi co-locationproperty for a respective coreset of the one or more coresets. In anexample, a TCI state of the one or more activated TCI states maycomprise/indicate an antenna port quasi co-location property for acoreset among the one or more coresets. In an example, the TCI state andthe antenna port quasi co-location property of the coreset may be thesame. The TCI state may comprise/indicate a reference signal for theantenna port quasi co-location property of the coreset. The TCI statemay comprise/indicate the quasi co-location type for the antenna portquasi co-location property of the coreset. The TCI state maycomprise/indicate the quasi co-location type for the reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a first medium accesscontrol control element (MAC CE) (e.g., TCI State Indication forUE-specific PDCCH MAC CE) activating a first TCI state of the one ormore first TCI states of the first coreset. In an example, the first MACCE may have a field indicating a first TCI state index (e.g., providedby a higher layer parameter tci-StateID) of the first TCI state. Basedon the field indicating the first TCI state, the wireless device mayactivate the first TCI state for the first coreset. Thereceiving/detecting a first PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on afirst antenna port quasi co-location property may comprisereceiving/detecting the first PDCCH in/via the first coreset based onthe first TCI state. The receiving/detecting the first PDCCH in/via thefirst coreset based on the first TCI state may comprise that (thewireless device determines that) at least one first DM-RS port of thefirst PDCCH is QCL-ed with a first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG.18) indicated by (or in) the first TCI state. The at least one firstDM-RS port of the first PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first referencesignal with respect to a first quasi co-location type indicated by thefirst TCI state. In an example, the first TCI state maycomprise/indicate the first antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe first coreset. In an example, the first TCI state and the firstantenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset may be thesame. The first TCI state may comprise/indicate the first referencesignal in/for the first antenna port quasi co-location property of thefirst coreset. The first TCI state may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type in/for the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the first coreset. The first TCI state may comprise/indicatethe first quasi co-location type for the first reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a second MAC CE (e.g.,TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE) activating a secondTCI state of the one or more second TCI states of the second coreset. Inan example, the second MAC CE may have a field indicating a second TCIstate index of the second TCI state. Based on the field indicating thesecond TCI state, the wireless device may activate the second TCI statefor the second coreset. The receiving/detecting a second PDCCH in/viathe second coreset based on a second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise receiving/detecting the second PDCCH in/via thesecond coreset based on the second TCI state. The receiving/detectingthe second PDCCH in/via the second coreset based on the second TCI statemay comprise that (the wireless device determines that) at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH is QCL-ed with a second referencesignal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 18) indicated by (or in) the second TCIstate. The at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may beQCL-ed with the second reference signal with respect to a second quasico-location type indicated by the second TCI state. In an example, thesecond TCI state may comprise/indicate the second antenna port quasico-location property of the second coreset. In an example, the secondTCI state and the second antenna port quasi co-location property of thesecond coreset may be the same. The second TCI state maycomprise/indicate the second reference signal in/for the second antennaport quasi co-location property of the second coreset. The second TCIstate may comprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type in/for thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property of the second coreset.The second TCI state may comprise/indicate the second quasi co-locationtype for the second reference signal.

In an example, the one or more activated TCI states may comprise thefirst TCI state for the first coreset and the second TCI state for thesecond coreset.

In an example, the (activated) first TCI state may be applicable/used toreceive a first PDCCH in the first coreset of an (active) downlink BWPof the cell. The (activated) first TCI state being applicable/used toreceive the first PDCCH in the first coreset of the (active) downlinkBWP of the cell may comprise that (the wireless device determines that)at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH is quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with a first reference signal (e.g., RS-1 in FIG. 18) indicatedby the first TCI state with respect to a first quasi co-location type(e.g., QCL TypeD) indicated by the first TCI state. In an example, the(activated) first TCI state being applicable/used to receive the firstPDCCH in the first coreset may comprise that the wireless devicereceives the first PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the first TCIstate.

In an example, the (activated) second TCI state may be applicable/usedto receive a second PDCCH in the second coreset of an (active) downlinkBWP of the cell. The (activated) second TCI state being applicable/usedto receive the second PDCCH in the second coreset may comprise that (thewireless device determines that) at least one second DM-RS port of thesecond PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a second reference signal(e.g., RS-2 in FIG. 18) indicated by the second TCI state with respectto a second quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD) indicated by thesecond TCI state. In an example, the (activated) second TCI state beingapplicable/used to receive the second PDCCH in the second coreset maycomprise that the wireless device receives the second PDCCH in/via thesecond coreset based on the second TCI state.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may not indicateone or more transmission configuration indicator (TCI) states for acoreset (e.g., Coreset 1, Coreset 2 in FIG. 18) of the one or morecoresets (e.g., by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddListand tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList). Based on the one or moreconfiguration parameters not indicating the one or more TCI states forthe coreset, the wireless device may monitor, for a DCI, a PDCCH in/viathe coreset based on an antenna port quasi co-location property (e.g.,DM-RS antenna port quasi co-location property) of the one or moreantenna port quasi co-location properties. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the PDCCH comprising the DCI in/via the coreset basedon the antenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving the PDCCHin/via the coreset based on the antenna port quasi co-location propertymay comprise that (the wireless device determines that) at least oneDM-RS port of the PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a referencesignal (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS). The at least one DM-RS port of thePDCCH being quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal maycomprise that the at least one DM-RS port of a reception of the PDCCH isquasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal. The at least oneDM-RS port of the PDCCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with thereference signal with respect to a quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeD, etc.). In an example, the wireless device mayuse/identify the reference signal during a random-access procedure. Inan example, the wireless device may initiate the random-access procedurefor an initial access procedure. The random-access procedure may be(initiated) for an initial access procedure. In an example, the one ormore configuration parameters may not indicate one or more first TCIstates for the first coreset. When the coreset is the first coreset, thereference signal may be the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG.18) and the antenna port quasi co-location property may be the firstantenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset. The one ormore configuration parameters may not indicate one or more second TCIstates for the second coreset. When the coreset is the second coreset,the reference signal may be the second reference signal (e.g., RS 2 inFIG. 18) and the antenna port quasi co-location property may be thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property of the second coreset.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate aplurality of transmission TCI states for a coreset of the one or morecoresets (e.g., by a higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddListand tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList). In an example, the one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate, for the coreset, the plurality oftransmission TCI states for a reconfiguration with sync procedure (e.g.,handover). In an example, the wireless device may not receive a MAC CE(e.g., TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE) activating aTCI state of the plurality of TCI states for the coreset. Based on theone or more configuration parameters indicating the plurality oftransmission TCI states and not receiving the MAC CE, the wirelessdevice may monitor, for a DCI, a PDCCH in/via the coreset based on anantenna port quasi co-location property (e.g., DM-RS antenna port quasico-location property). In an example, the wireless device may receivethe PDCCH with the DCI in/via the coreset based on the antenna portquasi co-location property. The receiving the PDCCH in/via the coresetbased on the antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that(the wireless device determines that) at least one DM-RS port of thePDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a reference signal (e.g.,SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS). The at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may bequasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect to aquasi co-location type (e.g., QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeD, etc.). In anexample, the wireless device may use/identify the reference signalduring/for a random-access procedure. The random-access procedure may be(initiated) for an initial access procedure. The random-access proceduremay be (initiated) by the reconfiguration with sync procedure. In anexample, when the coreset is the first coreset, the reference signal maybe the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 18) and the antennaport quasi co-location property may be the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset. In an example, when thecoreset is the second coreset, the reference signal may be the secondreference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 18) and the antenna port quasico-location property may be the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the second coreset.

In an example, the first reference signal in (or indicated by) the firstantenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset may be thereference signal used/identified, by the wireless device, during/for therandom-access procedure (e.g., initial access, reconfiguration with syncprocedure). In an example, the second reference signal in (or indicatedby) the second antenna port quasi co-location property of the secondcoreset may be the reference signal used/identified, by the wirelessdevice, during/for the random-access procedure (e.g., initial access,reconfiguration with sync procedure).

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate aplurality of transmission TCI states for a coreset (e.g., Coreset 1,Coreset 2 in FIG. 18) of the one or more coresets (e.g., by a higherlayer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList andtci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList). In an example, the coreset may beidentified by a coreset index that is equal to zero. In an example, thecoreset may be identified by a coreset index that is different from zero(e.g., non-zero). In an example, the wireless device may receive a MACCE (e.g., TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE) activatinga TCI state of the plurality of TCI states for the coreset. The TCIstate may comprise/indicate a reference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block,CSI-RS). The TCI state may comprise/indicate a quasi co-location type(e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeD). In an example, based on the one or moreconfiguration parameters indicating the plurality of transmission TCIstates and receiving the MAC CE activating the TCI state, the wirelessdevice may monitor, for a DCI, a PDCCH in/via the coreset based on anantenna port quasi co-location property (e.g., DM-RS antenna port quasico-location property). The monitoring, for the DCI, the PDCCH in/via thecoreset based on the antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise monitoring, for the DCI, the PDCCH in/via the coreset based onthe TCI state. In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect,in/via the coreset, the PDCCH with the DCI based on the antenna portquasi co-location property. The receiving/detecting the PDCCH in/via thecoreset based on the TCI state may comprise that (the wireless devicedetermines that) at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is QCL-ed with areference signal indicated by (or in) the TCI state. The at least oneDM-RS port of the PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the reference signal withrespect to a quasi co-location type indicated by the TCI state. In anexample, the TCI state may comprise/indicate the antenna port quasico-location property of the coreset. In an example, the TCI state andthe antenna port quasi co-location property of the coreset may be thesame. The TCI state may comprise/indicate the reference signal in/forthe antenna port quasi co-location property of the coreset. The TCIstate may comprise/indicate the quasi co-location type in/for theantenna port quasi co-location property of the coreset. The TCI statemay comprise/indicate the quasi co-location type for the referencesignal. In an example, when the coreset is the first coreset, thereference signal may be the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG.18), the quasi co-location type may be the first quasi co-location type,the TCI state signal may be the first TCI state and the antenna portquasi co-location property may be the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset. In an example, when thecoreset is the second coreset, the reference signal may be the secondreference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 18), the quasi co-location type maybe the second quasi co-location type, the TCI state signal may be thesecond TCI state and the antenna port quasi co-location property may bethe second antenna port quasi co-location property of the secondcoreset.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate aTCI state for a coreset (e.g., Coreset 1, Coreset 2 in FIG. 18) of theone or more coresets (e.g., by a higher layer parametertci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList). The TCIstate may be a single TCI state for the coreset. A number of the TCIstate for the coreset may be one. The TCI state may comprise/indicate areference signal (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS). The TCI state maycomprise/indicate a quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeD).In an example, based on the one or more configuration parametersindicating the TCI states for the coreset, the wireless device maymonitor, for a DCI, a PDCCH in/via the coreset based on an antenna portquasi co-location property (e.g., DM-RS antenna port quasi co-locationproperty). In an example, the wireless device may receive, in/via thecoreset, the PDCCH with the DCI based on the antenna port quasico-location property. In an example, the receiving the PDCCH in/via thecoreset based on the antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise that (the wireless device determines that) at least one DM-RSport of the PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signalindicated/configured by the TCI state. The receiving the PDCCH in/viathe coreset based on the antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise that (the wireless device determines that) at least one DM-RSport of the PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signalindicated/configured by the TCI state with respect to the quasico-location type indicated/configured by the TCI state.

In an example, the coreset may be the first coreset. In an example, thefirst TCI state of the first coreset may comprise/indicate the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. In an example, the first TCIstate of the first coreset and the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may be the same. In an example, the wireless device maymonitor, for a first DCI, a first PDCCH in/via the first coreset basedon the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The monitoring thefirst PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the first antenna portquasi co-location property may comprise that the wireless devicemonitors, for the first DCI, the first PDCCH in/via the first coresetbased on the first TCI state. The first TCI state may comprise/indicatethe first reference signal in/for the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset. The first TCI state maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type in/for the firstantenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset. Themonitoring the first PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the firstTCI state may comprise that (the wireless device determines that) atleast one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH is quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the first reference signal indicated/configured by thefirst TCI state with respect to the first quasi co-location typeindicated/configured by the first TCI state.

In an example, the coreset may be the second coreset. In an example, thesecond TCI state of the second coreset may comprise/indicate the secondantenna port quasi co-location property. In an example, the second TCIstate of the second coreset and the second antenna port quasico-location property may be the same. In an example, the wireless devicemay monitor, for a second DCI, a second PDCCH in/via the second coresetbased on the second antenna port quasi co-location property. Themonitoring the second PDCCH in/via the second coreset based on thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that thewireless device monitors, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in/viathe second coreset based on the second TCI state. The second TCI statemay comprise/indicate the second reference signal in/for the secondantenna port quasi co-location property of the second coreset. Thesecond TCI state may comprise/indicate the second quasi co-location typein/for the second antenna port quasi co-location property of the secondcoreset. The monitoring the second PDCCH in/via the second coreset basedon the second TCI state may comprise that (the wireless devicedetermines that) at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH isquasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signalindicated/configured by the second TCI state with respect to the secondquasi co-location type indicated/configured by the second TCI state.

In an example, a coreset, of the one or more coresets, may be identifiedwith a coreset index that is equal to zero. The wireless device maymonitor, for a DCI, a PDCCH in/via the coreset based on an antenna portquasi co-location property. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH comprising/including/with the DCI in/via the coresetbased on the antenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving thePDCCH in/via the coreset based on the antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that (the wireless device determines that) atleast one DM-RS port of the PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with areference signal. The wireless device may use/identify the referencesignal in/during a recent (or most recent or latest) random-accessprocedure. In an example, the recent random-access procedure may not beinitiated based on receiving a PDCCH order. In an example, the wirelessdevice may not initiate the recent random-access procedure based onreceiving a PDCCH order. In an example, the latest/recent random-accessprocedure may not be initiated based on receiving a PDCCH ordertriggering a non-contention based random-access procedure. In anexample, the wireless device may not receive a MAC CE (e.g., TCI StateIndication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE) activating a TCI state of theplurality of TCI states for the coreset after the recent random-accessprocedure. In an example, based on not receiving the MAC CE activatingthe TCI state for the coreset after the recent random-access procedure,the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH via the coreset may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the reference signal used/identified in/duringthe recent random-access procedure. In an example, when the coreset isthe first coreset (e.g., the first coreset index is equal to zero), thereference signal may be the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG.18) and the antenna port quasi co-location property may be the firstantenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset. In anexample, when the coreset is the second coreset (e.g., the secondcoreset index is equal to zero), the reference signal may be the secondreference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 18) and the antenna port quasico-location property may be the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the second coreset.

In an example, the cell may comprise a plurality of BWPs. The pluralityof BWPs may comprise one or more uplink BWPs comprising an uplink BWP ofthe cell. The plurality of BWPs may comprise one or more downlink BWPscomprising a downlink BWP of the cell.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate theone or more coresets on/for the downlink BWP of the cell.

In an example, a BWP of the plurality of BWPs may be in one of an activestate and an inactive state. In an example, the active state of adownlink BWP of the one or more downlink BWPs may comprise monitoring adownlink channel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for/via thedownlink BWP. In an example, the active state of a downlink BWP of theone or more downlink BWPs may comprise receiving a PDSCH on/via thedownlink BWP. In an example, the inactive state of a downlink BWP of theone or more downlink BWPs may comprise not monitoring a downlinkchannel/signal (e.g., PDCCH, DCI, CSI-RS, PDSCH) on/for the downlinkBWP. In an example, the inactive state of a downlink BWP of the one ormore downlink BWPs may comprise not receiving a PDSCH on/via thedownlink BWP.

In an example, the active state of an uplink BWP of the one or moreuplink BWPs may comprise transmitting an uplink signal/channel (e.g.,PUCCH, preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via the uplink BWP. In anexample, the inactive state of an uplink BWP of the one or more uplinkBWPs may comprise not transmitting an uplink signal/channel (e.g.,PUCCH, preamble, PUSCH, PRACH, SRS, etc.) via the uplink BWP.

In an example, the wireless device may activate the downlink BWP of theone or more downlink BWPs of the cell. In an example, the activating thedownlink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets the downlink BWPas an active downlink BWP of the cell. In an example, the activating thedownlink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets the downlink BWPin the active state. In an example, the activating the downlink BWP maycomprise switching the downlink BWP from the inactive state to theactive state.

In an example, the wireless device may activate the uplink BWP of theone or more uplink BWPs of the cell. In an example, the activating theuplink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets the uplink BWP asan active uplink BWP of the cell. In an example, the activating theuplink BWP may comprise that the wireless device sets the uplink BWP inthe active state. In an example, the activating the uplink BWP maycomprise switching the uplink BWP from the inactive state to the activestate.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order (e.g., PDCCH order in FIG. 18) initiatinga random-access procedure. The wireless device may receive the PDCCHorder via a first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 in FIG. 18) of the one ormore coresets. The random-access procedure may be a contention-freerandom-access procedure (e.g., non-contention based random-accessprocedure). The wireless device may initiate the random-access procedurebased on the receiving the PDCCH order. The wireless device may initiatethe random-access procedure for the cell. The PDCCH order mayinitiate/trigger the random-access procedure for the cell.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in the first coreset based on a first antenna port quasico-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 1 in FIG. 18) ofthe one or more antenna port quasi co-location properties. Monitoring,for the first DCI, the first PDCCH in the first coreset based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that thewireless device attempts to detect/receive the first PDCCH in the firstcoreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property. Themonitoring, for the first DCI, the first PDCCH in the first coresetbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property may comprisethat at least one first DM-RS antenna port the first PDCCH is quasico-located with a first reference signal indicated by (or in) the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. The at least one first DM-RSport of the first PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first reference signalwith respect to a first quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCLTypeA, etc.). The first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type. The first antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type for the first reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI, via the first coreset, based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. In an example, the first DCImay indicate the PDCCH order initiating the random-access procedure. Inan example, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order, via the firstcoreset, based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property. Thewireless device may receive the PDCCH order in/via the first corsetbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property. In anexample, based on the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order, the wirelessdevice may receive the PDCCH order in/via the first corset based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving/detectingthe first PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the first antenna portquasi co-location property may comprise that (the wireless devicedetermines that) the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH isquasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 inFIG. 18) indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH may beQCL-ed with the first reference signal with respect to the first quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.).

In an example, based on the receiving the PDCCH order, the wirelessdevice may transmit a random-access preamble (e.g., Preambletransmission in FIG. 18) for the random-access procedure. The wirelessdevice may transmit the random-access preamble via at least onerandom-access resource (e.g., PRACH occasion) of the active uplink BWPof the cell. The at least one random-access resource may comprise atleast one time resource. The at least one random-access resource maycomprise at least one frequency resource. A PRACH mask index field ofthe PDCCH order may indicate the at least one random-access resource(e.g., PRACH occasion). The at least one random-access resource may beassociated with a reference signal index (e.g., SS/PBCH block index), ofa reference signal, indicated by a reference signal index field in/ofthe PDCCH order. In an example, the wireless device may select, totransmit the random-access preamble, the at least one random-accessresource indicated by the PRACH mask index field. In an example, a valueof a random-access preamble index field in the PDCCH order may not bezero (e.g., non-zero). In an example, a value of a random-accesspreamble index field in the PDCCH order may be zero. The random-accesspreamble index may indicate/identify the random-access preamble. Thewireless device may transmit the random-access preamble indicated by therandom-access preamble index based on the reference signal identified bythe reference signal index that is indicated by the reference signalindex field in/of the PDCCH order. In an example, the wireless devicemay transmit the random-access preamble with a spatial transmissionfilter that is based on a spatial receiving filter used to receive thereference signal.

In an example, based on transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may monitor (or start monitoring) for a second DCI(e.g., DCI format 1_0, DCI in FIG. 18). In an example, the second DCImay schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response (e.g.,random-access response in FIG. 18). The random-access response may befor the random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambledby an RNTI (e.g., RA-RNTI, C-RNTI, CS-RNTI, MCS-C-RNTI, TC-RNTI, etc.).The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI. In an example, the RA-RNTI may be based onthe at least one random-access resource. In an example, the base stationand/or the wireless device may determine the RA-RNTI based on the atleast one random-access resource. The monitoring for the second DCI maycomprise that the wireless device attempts to detect/receive the secondDCI during a response window (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterra-ResponseWindow). The one or more configuration parameters mayindicate the response window. The wireless device may start the responsewindow based on transmitting the random-access preamble. The wirelessdevice may attempt to detect/receive the second DCI while the responsewindow is running. In an example, the wireless device may monitor, forthe second DCI, a second PDCCH in a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 inFIG. 18) of the one or more coresets. In an example, the second coresetand the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received may be different.In an example, the second coreset and the first coreset that the PDCCHorder is received may be the same. The monitoring, for the second DCI,the second PDCCH in the second coreset may comprise monitoring, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH for/in a search space set in (or associatedwith or linked to) the second coreset. In an example, the search spaceset may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example, the search space set maybe a common search space set. In an example, the search space set may beassociated with (or linked to) the second coreset. The search space setbeing associated with (or linked to) the second coreset may comprisethat a coreset index field in/of the search space set indicates a secondcoreset index of the second coreset. The search space set beingassociated with (or linked to) the second coreset may comprise that theone or more configuration parameters may indicate the second coresetindex of the second coreset in a coreset index field (e.g., provided bya higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId in the higher layerparameter SearchSpace) of the search space set. In an example, a valueof the coreset index field in/of the search space set may be equal tothe second coreset index of the second coreset. In an example, thesearch space set being associated with (or linked to) the second coresetmay comprise that the one or more configuration parameters may indicatethe second coreset index of the second coreset for the search space set.

In an example, a wireless device may monitor, for a DCI format with CRCscrambled by an RNTI (e.g., RA-RNTI or TC-RNTI), a PDCCH (or PDCCHcandidates) in a Type1-PDCCH CSS set on a cell (e.g., PCell. SCell). TheType1-PDCCH CSS set may be configured by ra-SearchSpace inPDCCH-ConfigCommon. The ra-SearchSpace may identify an index of a searchspace for a random-access procedure. The ra-SearchSpace may be an indexof a search space for a random-access procedure. The ra-SearchSpace maybe an identity of a search space for a random-access procedure.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate thera-search space for the active downlink BWP of the cell. In an example,the one or more configuration parameters may indicate the ra-searchspace for the search space set. The one or more configuration parametersindicating the ra-search space for the search space set may comprisethat a search space set index of the search space set is equal to thera-search space. The one or more configuration parameters indicating thera-search space for the search space set may comprise that the searchspace set is identified by the ra-search space.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. In an example, based on the monitoring, for the second DCI,the second PDCCH in the second coreset, the wireless device may update(replace/assume) the second antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe second coreset with the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the first coreset. In an example, based on the monitoring,for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset, the wirelessdevice may determine that the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the second coreset is same as the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. Based on the determining, the wireless device may monitor, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property. The monitoring, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) withthe first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 18) indicated by (or in)the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the firstreference signal with respect to a first quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type. Thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thefirst quasi co-location type for the first reference signal.

In an example, based on the monitoring, for the second DCI, the secondPDCCH in the second coreset, the wireless device may determine that thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property of the first PDCCHindicating/comprising the PDCCH order and the second antenna port quasico-location property of the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI arethe same. Based on the determining, the wireless device may set thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property same as the first antennaport quasi co-location property. Based on the setting, the secondantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise the first referencesignal in the first antenna port quasi co-location property. Based onthe setting, the second antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise the first quasi co-location type in the first antenna portquasi co-location property.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a third DCI, a thirdPDCCH in the second coreset. A CRC of the third DCI may not be scrambledby an RA-RNTI. A CRC of the third DCI may be scrambled by a second RNTI(e.g., C-RNTI, CS-RNTI) different from RA-RNTI. Based on the CRC notbeing scrambled by the RA-RNTI, the wireless device may monitor, for thethird DCI, the third PDCCH in the second coreset based on the secondantenna port quasi co-location property. The wireless device mayreceive, via the second coreset, the third PDCCH comprising/includingthe third DCI based on the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The monitoring (or receiving) the third PDCCH in/via thesecond coreset based on the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that (the wireless device determines that) atleast one third DM-RS port of the third PDCCH is quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the second reference signal indicated/configured by thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property. The at least one thirdDM-RS port of the third PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the second referencesignal with respect to the second quasi co-location type (e.g., QCLTypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH based on (or while) monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH for the search space set in the secondcoreset. In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset based on the first antennaport quasi co-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCHorder is received.

In an example, the second DCI (e.g., the CRC scrambled by an RA-RNTI)may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response (e.g.,random-access response in FIG. 18) corresponding to the random-accesspreamble (e.g., Preamble transmission in FIG. 18). In an example, thewireless device may receive the PDSCH based on the first antenna portquasi co-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. The receiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal(e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 18) indicated by (or in) the first antenna portquasi co-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. The receiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH and the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order are quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 18)indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasi co-location property.The receiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH and the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order are quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the same reference signal (e.g., the first referencesignal, RS 1 in FIG. 18) indicated by (or in) the first antenna portquasi co-location property.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal with respect to atleast one of: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delayspread, and spatial RX parameters. In an example, the at least one DM-RSport of the PDSCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the firstreference signal with respect to at least one of: Doppler shift, Dopplerspread, average delay, delay spread, spatial RX parameters whenapplicable. In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH maybe quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal withrespect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread,and spatial RX parameters when applicable.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be QCL-edwith the first reference signal with respect to a first quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type. The first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type for the firstreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may complete the random-accessprocedure based on receiving the PDSCH comprising random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise that therandom-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (or therandom-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDSCHscheduled by the third DCI based on the second antenna port quasico-location property of the second coreset. The receiving the secondPDSCH based on the second antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise that at least one DM-RS port of the second PDSCH is quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG.18) indicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the second coreset. In an example, the at least one DM-RSport of the second PDSCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with thesecond reference signal with respect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread,average delay, delay spread, spatial RX parameters when applicable.

FIG. 19 is an example of a random-access procedure as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more messages. In anexample, the wireless device may receive the one or more messages from abase station. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise physical random-access channel (PRACH) transmission parameters(e.g., PRACH preamble format, time resources, and frequency resourcesfor PRACH transmission). The one or more configuration parameters may befor a plurality of cells comprising a first cell (e.g., first cell inFIG. 19) and a second cell (e.g., second cell in FIG. 19).

In an example, the PRACH transmission parameters may be(configured/indicated) for a PRACH transmission (e.g., preambletransmission) via/of the first cell. In an example, the PRACHtransmission parameters may be (configured/indicated) for receiving arandom-access response via the second cell. In an example, the PRACHtransmission parameters may be (configured/indicated) for arandom-access procedure for the first cell. The first cell may be aprimary cell (PCell). The first cell may be a secondary cell (SCell).The second cell may be a primary cell (PCell). The second cell may be asecondary cell. In an example, the first cell may be an unlicensed cell.In an example, the first cell may be a licensed cell. In an example, thesecond cell may be an unlicensed cell. In an example, the second cellmay be a licensed cell.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatecell indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter ServCellID) forthe plurality of cells. In an example, each cell of the plurality ofcells may be identified by a respective cell index of the cell indices.In an example, the first cell may be identified by a first cell index ofthe cell indices. In an example, the second cell may be identified by asecond cell index of the cell indices.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate oneor more first coresets for the first cell. The one or more firstcoresets may comprise a first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 in FIG. 19). Inan example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate one ormore second coresets for the second cell. The one or more secondcoresets may comprise a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 in FIG. 19).

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset based on a first antenna port quasico-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 1 in FIG. 19). Themonitoring, for the first DCI, the first PDCCH in/via the first coresetbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property may comprisethat (the wireless device determines that) at least one first DM-RS portof the first PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a first referencesignal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 19) indicated by (or in) the first antennaport quasi co-location property. The at least one first DM-RS port ofthe first PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first reference signal withrespect to a first quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA,etc.). The first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type. The first antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type for the first reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a second DCI, asecond PDCCH in/via the second coreset based on a second antenna portquasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 2 in FIG.19). The monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in/via thesecond coreset based on the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that (the wireless device determines that) atleast one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH is quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with a second reference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 19)indicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasi co-location property.The at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may be QCL-edwith the second reference signal with respect to a second quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The second antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the second quasico-location type. The second antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type for the secondreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order (e.g., PDCCH order in FIG. 19) initiatinga random-access procedure. The wireless device may receive the PDCCHorder via the first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 in FIG. 19) of the firstcell. The random-access procedure may be a contention-free random-accessprocedure (e.g., non-contention based random-access procedure). Thewireless device may initiate the random-access procedure for the firstcell. The wireless device may initiate the random-access procedure basedon the receiving the PDCCH order. The PDCCH order may initiate/triggerthe random-access procedure for the first cell. The wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order via the first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 in FIG.19) of the first cell that the random-access procedure is initiated for.

In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI, via the first coreset, based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. In an example, the first DCImay indicate the PDCCH order initiating/triggering the random-accessprocedure. In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect thefirst PDCCH comprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order, via thefirst coreset, based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The wireless device may receive the PDCCH order in/via thefirst corset based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property.The receiving/detecting the first PDCCH in/via the first coreset basedon the first antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that(the wireless device determines that) the at least one first DM-RS portof the first PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first referencesignal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 19) indicated by (or in) the first antennaport quasi co-location property. The at least one first DM-RS port ofthe first PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first reference signal withrespect to the first quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA,etc.).

In an example, based on the receiving the PDCCH order, the wirelessdevice may transmit a random-access preamble (e.g., Preambletransmission in FIG. 19) for the random-access procedure. The wirelessdevice may transmit the random-access preamble via at least onerandom-access resource (e.g., PRACH occasion) of an uplink BWP (e.g., anactive uplink BWP) of the first cell.

In an example, based on the transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may monitor (or start monitoring) for a second DCI(e.g., DCI format 1_0, DCI in FIG. 19). In an example, the second DCImay schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response (e.g.,random-access response in FIG. 19). The random-access response may befor the random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambledby an RNTI (e.g., RA-RNTI, C-RNTI, CS-RNTI, MCS-C-RNTI, TC-RNTI, etc.).The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI. The monitoring for the second DCI maycomprise that the wireless device attempts to detect/receive the secondDCI during a response window (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterra-ResponseWindow). In an example, the wireless device may monitor, forthe second DCI, a second PDCCH in a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 inFIG. 19) of the one or more second coresets of the second cell. Themonitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coresetmay comprise monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH for/in asearch space set in (or associated with or linked to) the secondcoreset. In an example, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set.In an example, the search space set may be a common search space set. Inan example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatera-search space for the search space set. In an example, the searchspace set may be associated with (or linked to) the second coreset. Inan example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the second coreset beingassociated (or linked to) the search space set that is a Type1-PDCCH CSSset. In an example, the wireless device may determine monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on thesecond coreset being associated (or linked to) the search space set thatis a Type1-PDCCH CSS set.

In an example, the first cell and the second cell may be different. thefirst cell and the second cell may be different may comprise a firstcell index of the first cell being different from a second cell index ofthe second cell.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the second antenna portquasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated (orlinked to) the search space set. In an example, the wireless device maymonitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coresetbased on the second antenna port quasi co-location property of thesecond coreset that is associated (or linked to) the search space set(or Type1-PDCCH CSS set). The monitoring, for the second DCI, the secondPDCCH in the second coreset based on the second antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one second DM-RS port ofthe second PDCCH comprising the second DCI is quasi co-located (QCL-ed)with a second reference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 19) indicated by (orin) the second antenna port quasi co-location property of the secondcoreset. The at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may beQCL-ed with the second reference signal with respect to a second quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The second antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the second quasico-location type. The second antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type for the secondreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH based on (or while) monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH for the search space set in the secondcoreset. In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset based on the second antennaport quasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated(or linked to) the search space set.

In an example, the second DCI (e.g., the CRC scrambled by an RA-RNTI)may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response (e.g.,random-access response in FIG. 19) corresponding to the random-accesspreamble (e.g., Preamble transmission in FIG. 19). In an example, thewireless device may receive the PDSCH based on the second antenna portquasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated (orlinked to) the search space set. The receiving the PDSCH based on thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that atleast one DM-RS port of the PDSCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with thesecond reference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 19) indicated by (or in) thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property of the second coreset.The receiving the PDSCH based on the second antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH and the at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCHcomprising the second DCI are quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the secondreference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 19) indicated by (or in) the secondantenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving the PDSCH basedon the second antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise thatat least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH and the at least one second DM-RSport of the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI are quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the same reference signal (e.g., the second referencesignal, RS 2 in FIG. 19) indicated by (or in) the second antenna portquasi co-location property.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signal with respect to atleast one of: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delayspread, and spatial RX parameters. In an example, the at least one DM-RSport of the PDSCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the secondreference signal with respect to at least one of: Doppler shift, Dopplerspread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial RX parameters whenapplicable. In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH maybe quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signal withrespect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread,and spatial RX parameters when applicable.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be QCL-edwith the second reference signal with respect to a second quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The second antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the second quasico-location type. The second antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type for the secondreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may complete the random-accessprocedure based on receiving the PDSCH comprising the random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise thatthe random-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (orthe random-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

In an example, a wireless device may receive, e.g., from a base station,a PDCCH order initiating a random-access procedure (e.g.,contention-free random-access procedure) for a primary cell (PCell). Thewireless device may receive the PDCCH order via a first coreset of theprimary cell. The wireless device may receive the PDCCH order via thefirst coreset based on a first TCI state (or a first receiving beam).

The wireless device may transmit a random-access preamble for therandom-access procedure initiated by the PDCCH order. The wirelessdevice may start monitoring, for a DCI scheduling a random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble, a second coresetof the primary cell, for example based on the transmitting therandom-access preamble. In the existing technologies, the wirelessdevice may monitor, for the DCI, the second coreset based on the firstTCI state of the first coreset that the wireless device receives thePDCCH order. In the existing technologies, the wireless device mayreceive, via the primary cell, the random-access response based on thefirst TCI state of the first coreset that the wireless device receivesthe PDCCH order. In an example, the second coreset and the first coresetmay be the same. In an example, the second coreset and the first coresetmay be different.

In an example, a wireless device may be configured with a carrieraggregation. In an example, the wireless device may receive, via a firstcoreset of a secondary cell, a PDCCH order initiating a random-accessprocedure for a primary cell. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive, via the first coreset of the secondary cell, the PDCCH orderbased on a first TCI state (e.g., first receiving beam). The wirelessdevice may transmit, via the primary cell, a random-access preamble forthe random-access procedure initiated by the PDCCH order. In an example,based on the transmitting the random-access preamble, the wirelessdevice may start monitoring, for a DCI scheduling a random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble, a second coresetof the primary cell. In the implementation of the existing technologies,the wireless device monitors, for the DCI, the second coreset of theprimary cell based on the first TCI state of the first coreset of thesecondary cell that the wireless device receives the PDCCH order. Thismay not be efficient when the primary cell and the secondary celloperate in different frequencies. The primary cell and the secondarycell may use different beams to serve (or transmit to) the wirelessdevice. In an example, the wireless device may not receive the DCI inthe second coreset of the primary cell based on the first TCI state thatis used for the reception of the PDCCH order in the first coreset of thesecondary cell. The wireless device may not receive/detect the DCI viathe second coreset of the primary cell based on the first TCI state ofthe first coreset of the secondary cell. This may lead to retransmissionof the DCI resulting in increased battery consumption at the basestation; and increased latency for the random-access procedure.

Example embodiments implement an enhanced procedure for receiving a DCIscheduling a random-access response when the wireless device receives aPDCCH order via a first coreset of a secondary cell and monitors, forthe DCI, in a second coreset of a primary cell. In an exampleembodiment, the one or more configuration parameters or an activationcommand may indicate/activate the second coreset with a second TCIstate. The wireless device may receive the DCI based on the second TCIstate of the second coreset. The wireless device may not override thesecond TCI state of the second coreset with a first TCI state of thefirst coreset.

This enhanced process may reduce uplink overhead/retransmissions andinterference, reduce battery power consumption at the wireless deviceand the base station, and reduce delay/latency of random-accessprocedure.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the DCI scheduling therandom-access response. In the implementation of the existingtechnologies, the wireless device receives the random-access responsevia the primary cell based on the first TCI state of the first coresetof the secondary cell that the wireless device receives the PDCCH order.This may not be efficient when the primary cell and the secondary celloperate in different frequencies. The primary cell and the secondarycell may use different beams to serve (or transmit to) the wirelessdevice. In an example, the wireless device may not receive random-accessresponse via the primary cell based on the first TCI state that is usedfor the reception of the PDCCH order in the first coreset of thesecondary cell. The wireless device may not receive the random-accessresponse via the primary cell based on the first TCI state of the firstcoreset of the secondary cell. This may lead to retransmission of therandom-access response resulting in increased battery consumption at thebase station; and increased latency for the random-access procedure.

Example embodiments implement an enhanced procedure for receiving arandom-access response of a random-access procedure of a primary cellwhen the wireless device receives, via a first coreset of a secondarycell, a PDCCH order initiating the random-access procedure for theprimary cell. In an example embodiment, the one or more configurationparameters or an activation command may indicate/activate the secondcoreset of the primary cell with a second TCI state. The wireless devicemay receive the random-access response based on the second TCI state ofthe second coreset. The wireless device may not override the second TCIstate of the second coreset with a first TCI state of the first coreset.

This enhanced process may reduce uplink overhead/retransmissions andinterference, reduce battery power consumption at the wireless deviceand the base station, and reduce delay/latency of random-accessprocedure.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, e.g., from a base station,a PDCCH order initiating a random-access procedure (e.g.,contention-free random-access procedure) for a cell (e.g., PCell,SCell). The wireless device may receive the PDCCH order via a coreset ofthe cell. The wireless device may receive the PDCCH order via thecoreset based on a TCI state (or a receiving beam).

The wireless device may transmit a random-access preamble for therandom-access procedure initiated by the PDCCH order. The wirelessdevice may start monitoring, for a DCI scheduling a random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble, a second coreset,for example based on the transmitting the random-access preamble. In theexisting technologies, the wireless device may monitor, for the DCI, thesecond coreset based on the TCI state of the coreset that the wirelessdevice receives the PDCCH order. In an example, the second coreset andthe coreset may be the same. In an example, the second coreset and thecoreset may be different.

In an example, a wireless device may be served by a plurality of TRPscomprising a first TRP and a second TRP. The wireless device mayreceive/transmit downlink/uplink signals from/to the plurality of TRPs.The first TRP may be associated with a first coreset group comprisingone or more first coresets. The first TRP being associated with thefirst coreset group may comprise the TRP transmitting DCIs via the oneor more first coresets in the first coreset group. The first TRP beingassociated with the first coreset group may comprise the first TRP nottransmitting DCIs via one or more second coresets in a second coresetgroup that is different from the first coreset group. The second TRP maybe associated with the second coreset group.

In an example, the wireless device may receive, via a first coreset in afirst coreset group associated with a first TRP, a PDCCH orderinitiating a random-access procedure. In an example, the wireless devicemay receive, via the first coreset, the PDCCH order based on a TCI state(e.g., receiving beam) of the first coreset. The wireless device maytransmit a random-access preamble for the random-access procedureinitiated by the PDCCH order. In an example, based on the transmittingthe random-access preamble, the wireless device may start monitoring,for a DCI scheduling a random-access response corresponding to therandom-access preamble, a second coreset in a second coreset groupassociated with a second TRP. In the implementation of the existingtechnologies, the wireless device monitors, for the DCI, the secondcoreset in the second coreset group based on the TCI state of the firstcoreset in the first coreset group that the wireless device receives thePDCCH order. This may not be efficient when the first coreset group andthe second coreset group are different (e.g., different TRPs). In anexample, the wireless device may not receive the DCI in the secondcoreset based on the TCI state that is used for the reception of thePDCCH order in the first coreset. In an example, the first TRP and thesecond TRP may locate at different directions. The first TRP and thesecond TRP may use different beams to serve (or transmit to) thewireless device. The wireless device may not receive/detect the DCI viathe second coreset in the second coreset group based on the TCI state ofthe first coreset in the first coreset group. This may lead toretransmission of the DCI resulting in increased battery consumption atthe base station; and increased latency for the random-access procedure.

Example embodiments implement an enhanced procedure for receiving a DCIscheduling a random-access response when the wireless device receives aPDCCH order via a first coreset in a first coreset group and monitors,for the DCI, in a second coreset in a second coreset group that isdifferent from the first coreset group. In an example embodiment, theone or more configuration parameters or an activation command mayindicate/activate the second coreset with a second TCI state. Thewireless device may receive the DCI based on the second TCI state of thesecond coreset. The wireless device may not override the second TCIstate of the second coreset with the TCI state of the first coreset. Inan example embodiment, the base station may transmit the DCI schedulingthe random-access response via a second coreset of the first coresetgroup that the PDCCH order is received. The base station may nottransmit the PDCCH indicating/scheduling the random-access response viaa second coreset of a second coreset group that is different from thefirst coreset group.

This enhanced process may reduce uplink overhead/retransmissions andinterference, reduce station battery power consumption at the wirelessdevice and the base station, and reduce delay/latency of random-accessprocedure.

FIG. 20 is an example of a random-access procedure as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 21 is an example flowdiagram of a random-access procedure disclosed in FIG. 20.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more messages. In anexample, the wireless device may receive the one or more messages from abase station. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise physical random-access channel (PRACH) transmission parameters(e.g., PRACH preamble format, time resources, and frequency resourcesfor PRACH transmission). The one or more configuration parameters may befor a plurality of cells comprising a first cell (e.g., first cell inFIG. 20) and a second cell (e.g., second cell in FIG. 20). In anexample, the PRACH transmission parameters may be (configured/indicated)for a PRACH transmission (e.g., preamble transmission) via/of the secondcell. In an example, the PRACH transmission parameters may be(configured/indicated) for receiving a random-access response via thesecond cell. In an example, the PRACH transmission parameters may be(configured/indicated) for a random-access procedure for the secondcell.

In an example, the second cell may be a primary cell (PCell or SpCell).The first cell may be a secondary cell (SCell). In an example, thesecond cell may be a secondary cell (SCell). The first cell may be aprimary cell (PCell or SpCell).

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate oneor more first coresets for the first cell. The one or more firstcoresets may comprise a first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 in FIG. 20). Inan example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate one ormore second coresets for the second cell. The one or more secondcoresets may comprise a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 in FIG. 20).

In an example, the second cell may be a scheduled cell. In an example,the second cell may be a PUCCH SCell. A secondary cell is an PUCCH SCellwhen the secondary cell is configured, e.g., by a base station, withPUCCH resources. In an example, the first cell may be a scheduling cell.

In an example, the second cell may not comprise a control resource set(coreset). In an example, the one or more configuration parameters maynot indicate a coreset for the second cell. In an example, the one ormore configuration parameters may not indicate a coreset for an activedownlink BWP of the second cell.

In an example, when the second cell is a scheduled cell, the second cellmay be cross-carrier scheduled by a scheduling cell (e.g., the firstcell). The cell being cross-carrier scheduled by the scheduling cell maycomprise that the wireless device monitors, for a downlink controlinformation (DCI) scheduling a transport block (TB) for the second cell,downlink control channels (or coresets) of the scheduling cell. The TBmay be PDSCH. The TB may be PUSCH. The wireless device maytransmit/receive the TB via the second cell.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset of the first cell based on a firstantenna port quasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property1 in FIG. 20). The monitoring, for the first DCI, the first PDCCH in/viathe first coreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that (the wireless device determines that) atleast one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH comprising the first DCIis quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a first reference signal (e.g., RS 1in FIG. 20) indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasico-location property. The at least one first DM-RS port of the firstPDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first reference signal with respect to afirst quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). Thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thefirst quasi co-location type. The first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type for thefirst reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order (e.g., PDCCH order in FIG. 20) initiatinga random-access procedure. The wireless device may receive the PDCCHorder via the first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 in FIG. 20) of the firstcell. The random-access procedure may be a contention-free random-accessprocedure (e.g., non-contention based random-access procedure). ThePDCCH order may indicate the second cell. In an example, the PDCCH ordermay indicate a second cell index of the second cell. The wireless devicemay initiate the random-access procedure for the second cell. The PDCCHorder may initiate/trigger the random-access procedure for the secondcell. Based on the PDCCH order indicating the second cell, the wirelessdevice may initiate the random-access procedure for the second cell.

In an example, the second cell may be a SpCell. In an example, thesecond cell may be a PCell. The first cell may be a secondary cell(SCell).

In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI, via the first coreset, based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. In an example, the first DCImay indicate the PDCCH order initiating the random-access procedure. Inan example, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order, via the firstcoreset, based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property. Thewireless device may receive the PDCCH order in/via the first corsetbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, based on the receiving the PDCCH order, the wirelessdevice may transmit a random-access preamble (e.g., Preambletransmission in FIG. 20) for the random-access procedure. The wirelessdevice may transmit the random-access preamble via at least onerandom-access resource (e.g., PRACH occasion) of an uplink BWP (e.g., anactive uplink BWP) of the second cell.

In an example, based on the transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may monitor (or start monitoring) for a second DCI(e.g., DCI format 1_0, DCI in FIG. 20). In an example, the second DCImay schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response (e.g.,random-access response in FIG. 20). The random-access response may befor the random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambledby an RNTI. The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, asecond PDCCH in a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 in FIG. 20) of the oneor more second coresets of the second cell. The monitoring, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset may comprisemonitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH for/in a search spaceset in (or associated with or linked to) the second coreset. In anexample, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example,the search space set may be a common search space set. In an example,the one or more configuration parameters may indicate ra-search spacefor the search space set. In an example, the search space set may beassociated with (or linked to) the second coreset. In an example, thewireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in thesecond coreset based on the second coreset being associated (or linkedto) the search space set that is a Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example,the wireless device may determine monitoring, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the second coreset beingassociated (or linked to) the search space set that is a Type1-PDCCH CSSset.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that the first cell andthe second cell are different. The first cell and the second cell beingdifferent may comprise that a first cell index of the first cell and asecond cell index of the second cell are different. In an example, whenthe first cell and the second cell are different, the wireless devicemay monitor, for the second DCI, via the second coreset of the secondcell different than the first cell that the PDCCH order is receivedbased on a second antenna port quasi co-location property (e.g., Antennaport QCL property 2 in FIG. 20) of the second coreset. In an example,the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH inthe second coreset based on the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 2 in FIG. 20) of the secondcoreset that is associated (or linked to) the search space set. In anexample, based on the first cell and the second cell being different,the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH inthe second coreset based on the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the secondDCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on the second antennaport quasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated(or linked to) the search space set (or Type1-PDCCH CSS set). Themonitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coresetbased on the second antenna port quasi co-location property may comprisethat at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH is quasico-located (QCL-ed) with a second reference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG.20) indicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may beQCL-ed with the second reference signal with respect to a second quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The second antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the second quasico-location type. The second antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type for the secondreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that the first cell andthe second cell are the same (e.g., similar to FIG. 18, for example, thecell that the PDCCH order is received, the random-access preamble istransmitted, and the random-access response is received are the same).The first cell and the second cell being the same may comprise that afirst cell index of the first cell and a second cell index of the secondcell are the same. In an example, when the first cell and the secondcell are the same, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI,via the second coreset of the second cell same as the first cell thatthe PDCCH order is received based on the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. In an example, based on the first cell and the second cellbeing the same, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. In an example, based on the monitoring, for the second DCI,the second PDCCH in the second coreset, the wireless device may update(replace/assume) the second antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe second coreset with the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the first coreset. In an example, based on the monitoring,for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset, the wirelessdevice may determine that the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the second coreset is same as the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. Based on the determining, the wireless device may monitor, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property. The monitoring, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) withthe first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 20) indicated by (or in)the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the firstreference signal with respect to a first quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type. Thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thefirst quasi co-location type for the first reference signal. In anexample, the first corset and the second coreset may be the same. Thefirst corset and the second coreset being the same may comprise a firstcoreset index of the first corset and a second coreset index of thesecond coreset are the same. In an example, the first corset and thesecond coreset may be different. The first corset and the second coresetbeing different may comprise a first coreset index of the first corsetand a second coreset index of the second coreset are different.

In an example, the second cell may be a secondary cell (SCell). Thefirst cell may be a primary cell (PCell or SpCell).

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, asecond PDCCH in a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 in FIG. 20) of the oneor more first coresets of the first cell. The monitoring, for the secondDCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset may comprise monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH for/in a search space set in (orassociated with or linked to) the second coreset. In an example, thesearch space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example, the searchspace set may be a common search space set. In an example, the one ormore configuration parameters may indicate ra-search space for thesearch space set.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH via the second coreset of the first cell that the PDCCHorder is received. In an example, via the first cell, the wirelessdevice may monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH and receive thePDCCH order. In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property1 in FIG. 20) of the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. Inan example, based on the monitoring, for the second DCI, the secondPDCCH in the second coreset, the wireless device may update(replace/assume) a second antenna port quasi co-location property of thesecond coreset with the first antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe first coreset. In an example, based on the monitoring, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset, the second antennaport quasi co-location property of the second coreset may be same as thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order is received. In an example, the monitoring, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) withthe first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 20) indicated by (or in)the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the firstreference signal with respect to the first quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.).

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH based on (or while) monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH for the search space set in the secondcoreset. In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset based on the second antennaport quasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated(or linked to) the search space set. In an example, the wireless devicemay receive the second PDCCH comprising/including the second DCI for thesearch space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset basedon the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the firstcoreset that is the PDCCH order is received.

In an example, the second DCI may schedule a PDSCH comprising arandom-access response (e.g., random-access response in FIG. 20)corresponding to the random-access preamble (e.g., Preamble transmissionin FIG. 20). In an example, the wireless device may determine that thePDCCH order and the second DCI scheduling the PDSCH are received via thesame cell (e.g., the first cell). In an example, the wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order via the first cell. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH scheduling the PDSCH via the firstcell. In an example, the wireless device may receive the PDSCH via thefirst cell. In an example, the wireless device may receive the PDSCHbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the firstcoreset that the PDCCH order is received. In an example, based on thedetermining, the wireless device may receive the PDSCH based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order is received. The receiving the PDSCH based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at least oneDM-RS port of the PDSCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the firstreference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 20) indicated by (or in) the firstantenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset that thePDCCH order is received. The receiving the PDSCH based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at least oneDM-RS port of the PDSCH and the at least one first DM-RS port of thefirst PDCCH comprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order arequasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 inFIG. 20) indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The receiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH and the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order are quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the same reference signal (e.g., the first referencesignal, RS 1 in FIG. 20) indicated by (or in) the first antenna portquasi co-location property.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal with respect to atleast one of: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delayspread, and spatial RX parameters. In an example, the at least one DM-RSport of the PDSCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the firstreference signal with respect to at least one of: Doppler shift, Dopplerspread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial RX parameters whenapplicable. In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH maybe quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal withrespect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread,and spatial RX parameters when applicable.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be QCL-edwith the first reference signal with respect to a first quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type. The first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type for the firstreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may complete the random-accessprocedure based on receiving the PDSCH comprising the random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise thatthe random-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (orthe random-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

FIG. 22 is an example of a random-access procedure as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more messages. In anexample, the wireless device may receive the one or more messages from abase station. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise physical random-access channel (PRACH) transmission parameters(e.g., PRACH preamble format, time resources, and frequency resourcesfor PRACH transmission). The one or more configuration parameters may befor a cell. In an example, the PRACH transmission parameters may be(configured/indicated) for a PRACH transmission via/of the cell. In anexample, the PRACH transmission parameters may be (configured/indicated)for a random-access procedure for the cell. The cell may be a primarycell (PCell). The cell may be a secondary cell (SCell). The cell may bea secondary cell configured with PUCCH (e.g., PUCCH SCell). In anexample, the cell may be an unlicensed cell. In an example, the cell maybe a licensed cell.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate aplurality of coreset groups (e.g., Coreset group 1, Coreset group 2 inFIG. 22). In an example, the plurality of coreset groups may comprise aplurality of coresets (e.g., Coreset 1, Coreset 2, Coreset 3, andCoreset 4 in FIG. 22). In an example, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate the plurality of coreset groups for a downlinkBWP of the cell. In an example, the one or more configuration parametersmay indicate the plurality of coresets for the downlink BWP of the cell.Each coreset group of the plurality of coreset groups may compriserespective one or more coresets (e.g., Coreset 1 and Coreset 3 forCoreset group 1; Coreset 2 and Coreset 4 for Coreset group 2). In anexample, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate theplurality of coresets grouped into the plurality of coreset groups.

In an example, the plurality of coreset groups may comprise a firstcoreset group (e.g., Coreset group 1 in FIG. 22) and a second coresetgroup (e.g., Coreset group 2 in FIG. 22). The first coreset group maycomprise one or more first coresets (e.g., Coreset 1 and Coreset 3 inFIG. 22). In an example, the one or more first coresets may comprise afirst coreset (e.g., Coreset 1). The one or more first coresets maycomprise a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 3). The second coreset groupmay comprise one or more second coresets (e.g., Coreset 2 and Coreset 4in FIG. 22). In an example, the one or more second coresets may comprisea second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2). The one or more second coresets maycomprise a fourth coreset (e.g., Coreset 4).

In an example, the cell may comprise a plurality of transmission andreception points (TRPs). The plurality of TRPs may comprise a first TRP(e.g., TRP 1 in FIG. 22) and a second TRP (e.g., TRP 2 in FIG. 22). Thefirst TRP may transmit a downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH,DCI) via the first coreset group. Transmitting the downlinksignal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, DCI) via the first coreset group maycomprise that the first TRP may transmit the downlink signal/channel viaa coreset among the first coreset group. The first TRP may not transmita downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via the secondcoreset group. Not transmitting the downlink signal/channel (e.g.,PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via the second coreset group may comprise that thefirst TRP may not transmit the downlink signal/channel via a coresetamong the second coreset group. The second TRP may transmit a downlinksignal/channel (e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via the second coreset group.Transmitting the downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, DCI) via thesecond coreset group may comprise that the second TRP may transmit thedownlink signal/channel via a coreset among the second coreset group.The second TRP may not transmit a downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH,DCI) via the first coreset group. Not transmitting the downlinksignal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, DCI) via the first coreset group maycomprise that the second TRP may not transmit the downlinksignal/channel via a coreset among the first coreset group.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate TRPindices for the plurality of TRPs. In an example, each TRP of theplurality of TRPs may be identified by a respective TRP index of the TRPindices. In an example, a first TRP (e.g., TRP 1 in FIG. 22) of theplurality of TRPs may be identified by a first TRP index of the TRPindices. In an example, a second TRP (e.g., TRP 2 in FIG. 22) of theplurality of TRPs may be identified by a second TRP index of the TRPindices.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatecoreset indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterControlResourceSetId) for the plurality of coresets. In an example, eachcoreset of the plurality of coresets may be identified by a respectivecoreset index of the coreset indices. In an example, the first coresetmay be identified by a first coreset index of the coreset indices. In anexample, the second coreset may be identified by a second coreset indexof the coreset indices. In an example, the third coreset may beidentified by a third coreset index of the coreset indices. In anexample, the fourth coreset may be identified by a fourth coreset indexof the coreset indices.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatecoreset group indices for the plurality of coresets. In an example, eachcoreset of the plurality of coresets may be identified by a respectivecoreset group index of the coreset group indices. In an example, thefirst coreset of the first coreset group may be identified by a firstcoreset group index of the coreset group indices. In an example, thethird coreset of the first coreset group may be identified by a thirdcoreset group index of the coreset group indices. In an example, thesecond coreset of the second coreset group may be identified by a secondcoreset group index of the coreset group indices. In an example, thefourth coreset of the second coreset group may be identified by a fourthcoreset group of the coreset group indices.

In an example, the wireless device may group one or more coresets, ofthe plurality of coresets, with the same coreset group index in a (same)coreset group of the plurality of coreset groups. In an example, thewireless device may group coresets, of the plurality of coresets, withdifferent coreset group indices in different coreset groups. In anexample, one or more coresets, of the plurality of coresets, in acoreset group of the plurality of coreset groups may have/share the samecoreset group index. In an example, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate the same coreset group index for the one or morecoresets in the coreset group. One or more coreset group indices of theone or more coresets in the coreset group may be the same/equal. In anexample, a respective coreset group index of each coreset of the one ormore coresets in the coreset group may be the same/equal.

In an example, the one or more first coresets in the first coreset groupmay have/share the same coreset group index (e.g., zero, one, two,etc.). In an example, the one or more configuration parameters mayindicate the same coreset group index for the one or more first coresetsin the first coreset group. In an example, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate the same coreset group index for each coreset ofthe one or more first coresets in the first coreset group. In anexample, the first coreset group index and the third coreset group indexmay be the same/equal. The wireless device may group the first coresetand the third coreset in the first coreset group based on the firstcoreset group index and the third coreset group index being thesame/equal. The first coreset and the third coreset may be in the samecoreset group (e.g., the first coreset group) based on the first coresetgroup index and the third coreset group index being the same/equal.

In an example, the one or more second coresets in the second coresetgroup may have/share the same coreset group index (e.g., zero, one, two,etc.). In an example, the one or more configuration parameters mayindicate the same coreset group index for the one or more secondcoresets in the second coreset group. In an example, the one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the same coreset group index foreach coreset of the one or more second coresets in the second coresetgroup. In an example, the second coreset group index and the fourthcoreset group index may be the same/equal. The wireless device may groupthe second coreset and the fourth coreset in the second coreset groupbased on the second coreset group index and the fourth coreset groupindex being the same/equal. The second coreset and the fourth coresetmay be in the same coreset group (e.g., the second coreset group) basedon the second coreset group index and the fourth coreset group indexbeing the same/equal.

In an example, the first coreset group index and the second coresetgroup index may be different. The wireless device may group the firstcoreset and the second coreset in different coreset groups based on thefirst coreset group index and the second coreset group index beingdifferent. In an example, the wireless device may group the firstcoreset in the first coreset group. The wireless device may group thesecond coreset in the second coreset group that is different from thefirst coreset group based on the first coreset group index and thesecond coreset group index being different.

In an example, the plurality of coreset groups may be identified by (orassociated with) group indices. In an example, each coreset group of theplurality of coreset groups may be identified by a respective groupindex of the group indices. In an example, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate the group indices for the plurality of coresetgroups. In an example, the first coreset group may be identified by (orassociated with) a first group index of the group indices. The firstcoreset group being identified by (or associated with) the first groupindex may comprise that a respective coreset group index of each coresetin the first coreset group is equal to the first group index. The firstcoreset group being identified by (or associated with) the first groupindex may comprise that a respective coreset group index of each coresetof the one or more first coresets in the first coreset group is equal tothe first group index. In an example, the first coreset group index ofthe first coreset in the first coreset group is equal to the first groupindex. In an example, the third coreset group index of the third coresetin the first coreset group is equal to the first group index. The secondcoreset group may be identified by (or associated with) a second groupindex of the group indices. The second coreset group being identified by(or associated with) the second group index may comprise that arespective coreset group index of each coreset in the second coresetgroup is equal to the second group index. The second coreset group beingidentified by (or associated with) the second group index may comprisethat a respective coreset group index of each coreset of the one or moresecond coresets in the second coreset group is equal to the second groupindex. In an example, the second coreset group index of the secondcoreset in the second coreset group is equal to the second group index.In an example, the fourth coreset group index of the fourth coreset inthe second coreset group is equal to the second group index

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for DCI(s), PDCCH(s) viathe plurality of coresets based on one or more antenna port quasico-location properties (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 1, Antenna portQCL property 2, Antenna port QCL property 3, and Antenna port QCLproperty 4 in FIG. 22). In an example, the wireless device may monitor,for a DCI, a PDCCH via each coreset of the plurality of coresets basedon a respective antenna port quasi co-location property of one or moreantenna port quasi co-location properties. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive/detect the PDCCH(s) comprising the DCI(s), via theplurality of coresets, based on the one or more antenna port quasico-location properties. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive/detect the PDCCH comprising the DCI, via each coreset of theplurality of coresets, based on the respective antenna port quasico-location property of the one or more antenna port quasi co-locationproperties.

In an example, receiving/detecting a PDCCH comprising a DCI, via acoreset of the plurality of coresets, based on an antenna port quasico-location property of the one or more antenna port quasi co-locationproperties may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCHcomprising the DCI is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a reference signalindicated by (or in) the antenna port quasi co-location property. Theantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thereference signal (e.g., RS 1 for Coreset 1, RS 2 for Coreset 2, RS 3 forCoreset 2, RS 4 for Coreset 4 in FIG. 22). The antenna port quasico-location property may comprise/indicate a reference signal index(e.g., ssb-index, csi-rs index, etc.) of/indicating the referencesignal. The at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may be quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the reference signal with respect to a quasi co-locationtype (e.g., QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeB, QCL-TypeC, QCL-TypeD). The antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the quasico-location type. The antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the quasi co-location type for the reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset based on a first antenna port quasico-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 1 in FIG. 22) ofthe one or more antenna port quasi co-location properties. In anexample, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI, via the first coreset, based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a second DCI, asecond PDCCH in/via the second coreset based on a second antenna portquasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 2 in FIG.22) of the one or more antenna port quasi co-location properties. In anexample, the wireless device may receive/detect the second PDCCHcomprising the second DCI, via the second coreset, based on the secondantenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a third DCI, a thirdPDCCH in/via the third coreset based on a third antenna port quasico-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 3 in FIG. 22) ofthe one or more antenna port quasi co-location properties. In anexample, the wireless device may receive/detect the third PDCCHcomprising the third DCI, via the third coreset, based on the thirdantenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a fourth DCI, afourth PDCCH in/via the fourth coreset based on a fourth antenna portquasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCL property 4 in FIG.22) of the one or more antenna port quasi co-location properties. In anexample, the wireless device may receive/detect the fourth PDCCHcomprising the fourth DCI, via the fourth coreset, based on the fourthantenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, the first antenna port quasi co-location property and thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may be the same. In anexample, the first antenna port quasi co-location property and thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may be different. In anexample, the first antenna port quasi co-location property and the thirdantenna port quasi co-location property may be the same. In an example,the first antenna port quasi co-location property and the third antennaport quasi co-location property may be different. In an example, thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property and the fourth antennaport quasi co-location property may be the same. In an example, thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property and the fourth antennaport quasi co-location property may be different. In an example, thethird antenna port quasi co-location property and the second antennaport quasi co-location property may be the same. In an example, thethird antenna port quasi co-location property and the second antennaport quasi co-location property may be different. In an example, thefourth antenna port quasi co-location property and the second antennaport quasi co-location property may be the same. In an example, thefourth antenna port quasi co-location property and the second antennaport quasi co-location property may be different. In an example, thethird antenna port quasi co-location property and the fourth antennaport quasi co-location property may be the same. In an example, thethird antenna port quasi co-location property and the fourth antennaport quasi co-location property may be different.

In an example, the wireless device may group one or more coresets, ofthe plurality of coresets, with the same antenna port quasi co-locationproperty in a (same) coreset group of the plurality of coreset groups.In an example, the grouping the one or more coresets with the sameantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that the wirelessdevice groups the one or more coresets, each with a respective antennaport quasi co-location property indicating the same reference signal. Inan example, the grouping the one or more coresets with the same antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise that the wireless devicegroups the one or more coresets, each with a respective antenna portquasi co-location property indicating the same reference signal with thesame quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD). In an example, thewireless device may group coresets, of the plurality of coresets, withdifferent antenna port quasi co-location properties in different coresetgroups. In an example, one or more coresets, of the plurality ofcoresets, in a coreset group of the plurality of coreset groups mayhave/share the same antenna port quasi co-location property. In anexample, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate the sameantenna port quasi co-location property for the one or more coresets inthe coreset group. One or more antenna port quasi co-location propertiesof the one or more coresets in the coreset group may be the same. In anexample, a respective antenna port quasi co-location property of eachcoreset of the one or more coresets in the coreset group may be thesame.

In an example, the one or more first coresets in the first coreset groupmay have/share the same antenna port quasi co-location property. In anexample, the first antenna port quasi co-location property and the thirdantenna port quasi co-location property may be the same. In an example,the first antenna port quasi co-location property and the third antennaport quasi co-location property being the same may comprise that a firstreference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 22) in (or indicated by the firstantenna port quasi co-location property) and a third reference signal(e.g., RS 3 in FIG. 22) in (or indicated by the third antenna port quasico-location property) may be the same. In an example, the first antennaport quasi co-location property and the third antenna port quasico-location property being the same may comprise that a first referencesignal in (or indicated by the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty) and a third reference signal in (or indicated by the thirdantenna port quasi co-location property) may be QCL-ed with respect to aquasi co-location type (e.g., QCL-typeD). The wireless device may groupthe first coreset and the third coreset in the first coreset group basedon the first antenna port quasi co-location property and the thirdantenna port quasi co-location property being the same. The firstcoreset and the third coreset may be in the same coreset group (e.g.,the first coreset group) based on the first antenna port quasico-location property and the third antenna port quasi co-locationproperty being the same.

In an example, the one or more second coresets in the second coresetgroup may have/share the same antenna port quasi co-location property.In an example, the second antenna port quasi co-location property andthe fourth antenna port quasi co-location property may be the same. Inan example, the second antenna port quasi co-location property and thefourth antenna port quasi co-location property being the same maycomprise that a second reference signal (e.g., RS 2 in FIG. 22) in (orindicated by the second antenna port quasi co-location property) and afourth reference signal (e.g., RS 4 in FIG. 22) in (or indicated by thefourth antenna port quasi co-location property) may be the same. In anexample, the second antenna port quasi co-location property and thefourth antenna port quasi co-location property being the same maycomprise that a second reference signal in (or indicated by the secondantenna port quasi co-location property) and a fourth reference signalin (or indicated by the fourth antenna port quasi co-location property)may be QCL-ed with respect to a quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL-typeD). The wireless device may group the second coreset and thefourth coreset in the second coreset group based on the second antennaport quasi co-location property and the fourth antenna port quasico-location property being the same. The second coreset and the fourthcoreset may be in the same coreset group (e.g., the second coresetgroup) based on the second antenna port quasi co-location property andthe fourth antenna port quasi co-location property being the same.

In an example, the wireless device may group two coresets in differentcoreset groups based on the respective antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the two coresets being different. In an example, a firstantenna port quasi co-location property and a second antenna port quasico-location property may be different. In an example, the first antennaport quasi co-location property and the second antenna port quasico-location property being different may comprise that a first referencesignal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 22) in (or indicated by the first antennaport quasi co-location property) and a second reference signal (e.g., RS2 in FIG. 22) in (or indicated by the second antenna port quasico-location property) may be different. In an example, the first antennaport quasi co-location property and the second antenna port quasico-location property being different may comprise that a first referencesignal in (or indicated by the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty) and a second reference signal in (or indicated by the secondantenna port quasi co-location property) may not be QCL-ed with respectto a quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL-typeD). The wireless device maygroup the first coreset and the second coreset in different coresetgroups based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property andthe second antenna port quasi co-location property being different. Thefirst coreset and the second coreset may be in different coreset groupsbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property and thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property being different. In anexample, the wireless device may group the first coreset in the firstcoreset group. The wireless device may group the second coreset in thesecond coreset group that is different from the first coreset groupbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property and thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property being different.

In an example, the cell may comprise a plurality of BWPs. The pluralityof BWPs may comprise one or more uplink BWPs comprising an uplink BWP ofthe cell. The plurality of BWPs may comprise one or more downlink BWPscomprising a downlink BWP of the cell.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate theplurality of coresets on/for the downlink BWP of the cell.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate thePRACH transmission parameters (e.g., time-frequency resources, PRACHoccasion, etc.) on/for the uplink BWP of the cell.

In an example, the wireless device may activate the downlink BWP of theone or more downlink BWPs of the cell as an active downlink BWP of thecell. In an example, the wireless device may activate the uplink BWP ofthe one or more uplink BWPs of the cell as an active uplink BWP.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order (e.g., PDCCH order in FIG. 22) initiatinga random-access procedure. The wireless device may receive the PDCCHorder via a first coreset of the first coreset group (e.g., Coreset 1 inCoreset group 1 in FIG. 22). The random-access procedure may be acontention-free random-access procedure (e.g., non-contention basedrandom-access procedure). The wireless device may initiate therandom-access procedure for the cell. The PDCCH order mayinitiate/trigger the random-access procedure for the cell. The wirelessdevice may initiate the random-access procedure based on the receivingthe PDCCH order.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received based ona first antenna port quasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCLproperty 1 in FIG. 22). The monitoring, for the first DCI, the firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that (the wireless device determinesthat) at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH comprising thefirst DCI is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a first reference signal(e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 22) indicated by (or in) the first antenna portquasi co-location property. The at least one first DM-RS port of thefirst PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first reference signal with respectto a first quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.).The first antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicatethe first quasi co-location type. The first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasi co-locationtype for the first reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI while monitoring, for the first DCI, the firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive/detect the first PDCCH comprising the first DCI, via the firstcoreset, based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property. Inan example, the first DCI may indicate the PDCCH orderinitiating/triggering the random-access procedure. In an example, thewireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCH comprising the firstDCI indicating the PDCCH order, via the first coreset, based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property. The wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order in/via the first corset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving/detecting thefirst PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the first antenna portquasi co-location property may comprise that (the wireless devicedetermines that) the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH isquasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 inFIG. 22) indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH may beQCL-ed with the first reference signal with respect to the first quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.).

In an example, based on the receiving the PDCCH order, the wirelessdevice may transmit a random-access preamble for the random-accessprocedure. The wireless device may transmit the random-access preamblevia at least one random-access resource (e.g., PRACH occasion) of theactive uplink BWP of the cell.

In an example, based on transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may monitor (or start monitoring) for a second DCI(e.g., DCI format 1_0, DCI in FIG. 22). In an example, the second DCImay schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response (e.g.,Random-access response in FIG. 22). The random-access response may befor the random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambledby an RNTI (e.g., RA-RNTI, C-RNTI, CS-RNTI, MCS-C-RNTI, TC-RNTI, etc.).The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI.

The monitoring for the second DCI may comprise that the wireless deviceattempts to detect/receive the second DCI during a response window(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter ra-ResponseWindow).

In an example, the monitoring for the second DCI may comprise that thewireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, a second PDCCH in asecond coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 in Coreset group 2 in FIG. 22) of thesecond coreset group. The monitoring, for the second DCI, the secondPDCCH in the second coreset of the second coreset group may comprisethat the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, the secondPDCCH in PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for a search space set associatedwith (or linked to) the second coreset of the second coreset group. Theone or more configuration parameters may indicate the PDCCH monitoringoccasions of/for the search space set. In an example, the wirelessdevice may monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the secondcoreset based on a second antenna port quasi co-location property of thesecond coreset that is associated with (or linked to) the search spaceset. In an example, the wireless device may determine that the firstcoreset group comprising the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived may be different from the second coreset group comprising thesecond coreset that is monitored for the second DCI. In an example,based on the determining, the wireless device may monitor, for thesecond DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on the secondantenna port quasi co-location property of the second coreset that isassociated with (or linked to) the search space set. In an example, thesearch space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example, the searchspace set may be a common search space set. In an example, the searchspace set may be associated with (or linked to) the second coreset. Inan example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate ara-search space for the search space set.

In an example, the monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH inthe second coreset based on the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that at least one second DM-RS port of the secondPDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a second reference signal (e.g.,RS 2 in FIG. 22) indicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasico-location property. The at least one second DM-RS port of the secondPDCCH may be QCL-ed with the second reference signal with respect to asecond quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). Thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thesecond quasi co-location type. The second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type for thesecond reference signal.

In an example, the first coreset group comprising the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order is received and the second coreset group comprising thesecond coreset that is monitored for the second DCI may be different. Inan example, the wireless device may determine that the first coresetgroup and the second coreset group are different. The first coresetgroup and the second coreset group being different may comprise that afirst group index of the first coreset group and a second group index ofthe second coreset group are different.

In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH based on (or while) monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH for the search space set in the secondcoreset. In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset based on the second antennaport quasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated(or linked to) the search space set. The wireless device may completethe random-access procedure based on the receiving the second PDCCH. Thesecond DCI may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response(e.g., random-access response in FIG. 22) corresponding to therandom-access preamble. In an example, the wireless device may completethe random-access procedure based on receiving random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise that therandom-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (or therandom-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

In an example, the monitoring for the second DCI may comprise that thewireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, a second PDCCH in asecond coreset (e.g., Coreset 1 or Coreset 3 in Coreset group 1 in FIG.22) of the first coreset group. The monitoring, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset of the first coreset group maycomprise that the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for a search space setassociated with (or linked to) the second coreset of the first coresetgroup. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate the PDCCHmonitoring occasions of/for the search space set. In an example, thewireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in thesecond coreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. In anexample, based on the monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCHin the second coreset, the wireless device may update (replace/assume) asecond antenna port quasi co-location property of the second coresetwith the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the firstcoreset. In an example, based on the monitoring, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset, the second antenna port quasico-location property of the second coreset may be same as the firstantenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset that thePDCCH order is received. In an example, the wireless device maydetermine that the first coreset group comprises the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order and the second coreset that is monitored for the secondDCI. In an example, the wireless device may determine that the firstcoreset that the PDCCH order is received and the second coreset that ismonitored for the second DCI belong the first coreset group (e.g., samecoreset group). In an example, based on the determining, the wirelessdevice may monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the secondcoreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. In an example, thesearch space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example, the searchspace set may be a common search space set. In an example, the searchspace set may be associated with (or linked to) the second coreset. Inan example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate ara-search space for the search space set.

In an example, the monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH inthe second coreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that at least one second DM-RS port of the secondPDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal(e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 22) indicated by (or in) the first antenna portquasi co-location property. The at least one second DM-RS port of thesecond PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first reference signal with respectto the first quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.).

In an example, based on the monitoring, for the second DCI, the secondPDCCH in the second coreset, the wireless device may determine that thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property of the first PDCCHindicating/comprising the PDCCH order and the second antenna port quasico-location property of the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI arethe same. Based on the determining, the wireless device may set thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property same as the first antennaport quasi co-location property. Based on the setting, the secondantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise the first referencesignal in the first antenna port quasi co-location property. Based onthe setting, the second reference signal may be updated with the firstreference signal in the first antenna port quasi co-location property.Based on the setting, the second antenna port quasi co-location propertymay comprise the first quasi co-location type in the first antenna portquasi co-location property. Based on the setting, the second quasico-location type may be updated with the first quasi co-location type inthe first antenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH based on (or while) monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH for the search space set in the secondcoreset. In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset based on the first antennaport quasi co-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCHorder is received.

In an example, the second DCI (e.g., the CRC scrambled by an RA-RNTI)may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response (e.g.,random-access response in FIG. 22) corresponding to the random-accesspreamble. In an example, the wireless device may receive the PDSCH basedon the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the firstcoreset that the PDCCH order is received. In an example, when the firstcoreset group comprises the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived and the second coreset that the second DCI scheduling the PDSCHis received, the wireless device may receive the PDSCH based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order is received. In an example, based on the determiningthat the PDCCH order and the second DCI scheduling the PDSCH arereceived via the first coreset group (e.g., same coreset group), thewireless device may receive the PDSCH based on the first antenna portquasi co-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. The receiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal(e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 22) indicated by (or in) the first antenna portquasi co-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. The receiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH and the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order are quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 22)indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasi co-location property.The receiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH and the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order are quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the same reference signal (e.g., the first referencesignal, RS 1 in FIG. 22) indicated by (or in) the first antenna portquasi co-location property. In an example, the first coreset and thesecond coreset in the first coreset group may be the same. In anexample, the first coreset and the second coreset in the first coresetgroup may be different.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal with respect to atleast one of: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delayspread, and spatial RX parameters. In an example, the at least one DM-RSport of the PDSCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the firstreference signal with respect to at least one of: Doppler shift, Dopplerspread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial RX parameters whenapplicable. In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH maybe quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal withrespect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread,and spatial RX parameters when applicable.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be QCL-edwith the first reference signal with respect to a first quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type. The first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type for the firstreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may complete the random-accessprocedure based on receiving the PDSCH comprising the random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise thatthe random-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (orthe random-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

FIG. 23 is an example flow diagram of a random-access procedure as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, e.g., from a base station,one or more messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters for a plurality of control resource set(coreset) groups of a cell (e.g., PCell, SCell).

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating/triggering a random-accessprocedure. In an example, the PDCCH order may initiate/trigger therandom-access procedure for the cell. In an example, the PDCCH order mayinitiate/trigger the random-access procedure for a second cell (e.g.,SCell) different from the cell. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order via a first coreset among a first coreset groupof the plurality of coreset groups.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset based on a first antenna port quasico-location property. In an example, the wireless device may receive,via the first coreset, the first PDCCH comprising the first DCI. In anexample, the first DCI may indicate the PDCCH orderinitiating/triggering the random-access procedure. In an example, thewireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCH comprising the firstDCI indicating the PDCCH order, via the first coreset, based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property. The wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order in/via the first corset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving/detecting thefirst PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the first antenna portquasi co-location property may comprise that (the wireless devicedetermines that) the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCH isquasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a first reference signal indicated by (orin) the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The at least onefirst DM-RS port of the first PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the firstreference signal with respect to a first quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may indicate the first quasi co-location type.

In an example, the wireless device may transmit a random-access preamblefor the random-access procedure. In an example, based on the receivingthe PDCCH order, the wireless device may transmit the random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure.

In an example, based on transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may monitor (or start monitoring) for a second DCI(e.g., DCI format 1_0). In an example, the second DCI may schedule aPDSCH comprising a random-access response. The random-access responsemay be for the random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCI may bescrambled by an RNTI. The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI.

In an example, the monitoring for the second DCI may comprise that thewireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, a second PDCCH in asecond coreset of a second coreset group of the plurality of coresetgroups. The monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in thesecond coreset may comprise that the wireless device may monitor, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH in PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for asearch space set associated with (or linked to) the second coreset. Inan example, the search space set may be Type 1-PDCCH CSS set. In anexample, the search space set may be a common search space set. In anexample, the search space set may be associated with (or linked to) thesecond coreset. In an example, the one or more configuration parametersmay indicate a ra-search space for the search space set.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that the first coresetgroup that the PDCCH order is received and the second coreset group thatis monitored for the second DCI are different. For example, in FIG. 22,the first coreset group is Coreset group 1 and the second coreset groupis Coreset group 2. In an example, the first coreset group may compriseat least one first coreset identified by at least one first coresetgroup index. In an example, the second coreset group may comprise atleast one second coreset identified by at least one second coreset groupindex. The first coreset group and the second coreset group beingdifferent may comprise that the at least one first coreset group indexand the at least one second coreset group index are different. The firstcoreset group and the second coreset group being different may comprisethat a first group index of the first coreset group and a second groupindex of the second coreset group are different.

In an example, the second coreset may be associated with a secondantenna port quasi co-location property. In an example, the secondcoreset being associated with the second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that the wireless device monitors, for a DCI, aPDCCH in/via the second coreset based on the second antenna port quasico-location property. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive/detect the PDCCH comprising the DCI, via the second coreset,based on the second antenna port quasi co-location property. Thereceiving/detecting (or monitoring) the PDCCH in/via the second coresetbased on the second antenna port quasi co-location property may comprisethat (the wireless device determines that) at least one DM-RS port ofthe PDCCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a second reference signalindicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasi co-location property.The at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the secondreference signal with respect to a second quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The second antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type. Thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate thesecond quasi co-location type for the second reference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the second antenna portquasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated with(or linked to) the search space set. In an example, based on thedetermining that the first coreset group and the second coreset groupbeing different, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI,the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on the second antenna portquasi co-location property of the second coreset that is associated with(or linked to) the search space set. In an example, the monitoring, forthe second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that atleast one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH comprising the secondDCI is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signalindicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasi co-location property.The at least one second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may be QCL-edwith the second reference signal with respect to the second quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The second antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the second quasico-location type. The second antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the second quasi co-location type for the secondreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the secondDCI (e.g., the CRC scrambled by an RA-RNTI) may schedule a PDSCHcomprising a random-access response corresponding to the random-accesspreamble. In an example, the wireless device may receive the PDSCH basedon the second antenna port quasi co-location property of the secondcoreset that is associated (or linked to) the search space set. In anexample, when the first coreset group comprising the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order is received is different from the second coreset groupcomprising the second coreset that the second DCI scheduling the PDSCHis received, the wireless device may receive the PDSCH based on thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property of the second coresetthat is associated (or linked to) the search space set. In an example,based on the determining that the first coreset group and the secondcoreset group are different, the wireless device may receive the PDSCHbased on the second antenna port quasi co-location property of thesecond coreset that is associated (or linked to) the search space set.The receiving the PDSCH based on the second antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signalindicated by (or in) the second antenna port quasi co-location propertyof the second coreset. The receiving the PDSCH based on the secondantenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at least oneDM-RS port of the PDSCH and the at least one second DM-RS port of thesecond PDCCH comprising the second DCI are quasi co-located (QCL-ed)with the second reference signal indicated by (or in) the second antennaport quasi co-location property. The receiving the PDSCH based on thesecond antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that atleast one DM-RS port of the PDSCH and the at least one second DM-RS portof the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI are quasi co-located(QCL-ed) with the same reference signal (e.g., the second referencesignal, RS 2 in FIG. 22) indicated by (or in) the second antenna portquasi co-location property.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signal with respect to atleast one of: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delayspread, and spatial RX parameters. In an example, the at least one DM-RSport of the PDSCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the secondreference signal with respect to at least one of: Doppler shift, Dopplerspread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial RX parameters whenapplicable. In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH maybe quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the second reference signal withrespect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread,and spatial RX parameters when applicable.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that the first coresetgroup that the PDCCH order is received and the second coreset group thatis monitored for the second DCI are the same. For example, in FIG. 22,the first coreset group is Coreset group 1 and the second coreset groupis Coreset group 1. For example, in FIG. 22, the first coreset group isCoreset group 2 and the second coreset group is Coreset group 2. In anexample, the first coreset group may comprise at least one first coresetidentified by at least one first coreset group index. In an example, thesecond coreset group may comprise at least one second coreset identifiedby at least one second coreset group index. The first coreset group andthe second coreset group being the same may comprise that the at leastone first coreset group index and the at least one second coreset groupindex are the same. The first coreset group and the second coreset groupbeing the same may comprise that a first group index of the firstcoreset group and a second group index of the second coreset group arethe same.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. In an example, based on the determining that the first coresetgroup and the second coreset group being the same, the wireless devicemay monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coresetbased on the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the firstcoreset that the PDCCH order is received. In an example, the monitoring,for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coreset based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at leastone second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI isquasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal indicated by(or in) the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The at leastone second DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the firstreference signal with respect to the first quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.).

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI in the second coreset. In anexample, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCH based on (orwhile) monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH for the searchspace set in the second coreset. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive the second PDCCH comprising/including the second DCI for thesearch space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset basedon the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the firstcoreset that the PDCCH order is received. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH comprising/including the second DCIfor the search space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the secondcoreset based on the second antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe second coreset that is associated with (or linked to) the searchspace set.

In an example, the second DCI (e.g., the CRC scrambled by an RA-RNTI)may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response correspondingto the random-access preamble. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. In anexample, when the first coreset group comprising the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order is received is the same as the second coreset groupcomprising the second coreset that the second DCI scheduling the PDSCHis received, the wireless device may receive the PDSCH based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property of the first coreset thatthe PDCCH order is received. In an example, based on the determiningthat the first coreset group and the second coreset group are the same,the wireless device may receive the PDSCH based on the first antennaport quasi co-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCHorder is received. In an example, based on the determining that thePDCCH order and the second DCI scheduling the PDSCH are received via thesame coreset group (e.g., the first coreset group), the wireless devicemay receive the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty of the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. Thereceiving the PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty may comprise that at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH is quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal indicated by (or in)the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the first coresetthat the PDCCH order is received. The receiving the PDSCH based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property may comprise that at leastone DM-RS port of the PDSCH and the at least one first DM-RS port of thefirst PDCCH comprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order arequasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal indicated by(or in) the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The receivingthe PDSCH based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise that at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH and the at least onefirst DM-RS port of the first PDCCH comprising the first DCI indicatingthe PDCCH order are quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the same referencesignal (e.g., the first reference signal, RS 1 in FIG. 22) indicated by(or in) the first antenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be quasico-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal with respect to atleast one of: Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delayspread, and spatial RX parameters. In an example, the at least one DM-RSport of the PDSCH may be quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the firstreference signal with respect to at least one of: Doppler shift, Dopplerspread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial RX parameters whenapplicable. In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH maybe quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with the first reference signal withrespect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread,and spatial RX parameters when applicable.

In an example, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH may be QCL-edwith the first reference signal with respect to a first quasico-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). The first antennaport quasi co-location property may comprise/indicate the first quasico-location type. The first antenna port quasi co-location property maycomprise/indicate the first quasi co-location type for the firstreference signal.

In an example, the wireless device may complete the random-accessprocedure based on receiving the PDSCH comprising the random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise thatthe random-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (orthe random-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

FIG. 24 is an example of a random-access procedure as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order (e.g., PDCCH order in FIG. 24) initiatinga random-access procedure. The wireless device may receive the PDCCHorder via a first coreset of the first coreset group (e.g., Coreset 1 inCoreset group 1 in FIG. 24). The random-access procedure may be acontention-free random-access procedure (e.g., non-contention basedrandom-access procedure). The wireless device may initiate therandom-access procedure for the cell. The PDCCH order mayinitiate/trigger the random-access procedure for the cell. The wirelessdevice may initiate the random-access procedure for a second celldifferent from the cell. The wireless device may initiate therandom-access procedure based on the receiving the PDCCH order.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received based ona first antenna port quasi co-location property (e.g., Antenna port QCLproperty 1 in FIG. 24). In an example, the wireless device mayreceive/detect the first PDCCH comprising the first DCI whilemonitoring, for the first DCI, the first PDCCH in/via the first coreset.In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI, via the first coreset, based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. In an example, the first DCImay indicate the PDCCH order initiating/triggering the random-accessprocedure. In an example, the wireless device may receive/detect thefirst PDCCH comprising the first DCI indicating the PDCCH order, via thefirst coreset, based on the first antenna port quasi co-locationproperty. The wireless device may receive the PDCCH order in/via thefirst corset based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property.

In an example, based on the receiving the PDCCH order, the wirelessdevice may transmit a random-access preamble for the random-accessprocedure.

In an example, based on the transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may determine a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 1, Coreset3 in FIG. 24) among the first coreset group comprising the first coresetthat the PDCCH order is received. In an example, the wireless device maydetermine the second coreset among the first coreset group based on thefirst coreset group comprising the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. In an example, the wireless device may determine the secondcoreset among the first coreset group based on receiving the PDCCH ordervia the first coreset in the first coreset group. In an example, thefirst coreset group may comprise the first coreset that the PDCCH isreceived and the second coreset that is monitored for a second DCIscheduling a random-access response (for the random-access preamble). Inan example, the second coreset and the first coreset may be the same(e.g., both Coreset 1 or Coreset 3 in FIG. 24). The first coreset andthe second coreset being the same may comprise that a first coresetindex of the first coreset and a second coreset index of the secondcoreset are the same. In an example, the first coreset and the secondcoreset may be different (e.g., the first coreset is Coreset 1 and thesecond coreset is Coreset 3 in FIG. 24). The first coreset and thesecond coreset being different may comprise that a first coreset indexof the first coreset and a second coreset index of the second coresetare different.

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset among thefirst coreset group, the wireless device may monitor (or startmonitoring), for a second DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_0, DCI in FIG. 24), asecond PDCCH in the second coreset of the first coreset group. In anexample, the second DCI may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-accessresponse (e.g., Random-access response in FIG. 24). The random-accessresponse may be for the random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCImay be scrambled by an RNTI (e.g., RA-RNTI, C-RNTI, CS-RNTI, MCS-C-RNTI,TC-RNTI, etc.). The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI.

The monitoring for the second DCI may comprise that the wireless deviceattempts to detect/receive the second DCI during a response window(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter ra-ResponseWindow). Themonitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the second coresetof the first coreset group may comprise that the wireless device maymonitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in PDCCH monitoringoccasions of/for a search space set associated with (or linked to) thesecond coreset. The one or more configuration parameters may indicatethe PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for the search space set. In anexample, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example,the search space set may be a common search space set. In an example,the search space set may be associated with (or linked to) the secondcoreset. In an example, the one or more configuration parameters mayindicate a ra-search space (e.g., RA-search space 1 in FIG. 24) for thesearch space set of the second coreset (e.g., Coreset 3 in FIG. 24).

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for the second DCI, thesecond PDCCH in the second coreset based on the first antenna port quasico-location property of the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. In an example, the monitoring, for the second DCI, the secondPDCCH in the second coreset based on the first antenna port quasico-location property may comprise that at least one second DM-RS port ofthe second PDCCH comprising the second DCI is quasi co-located (QCL-ed)with a first reference signal (e.g., RS 1 in FIG. 24) indicated by (orin) the first antenna port quasi co-location property. The at least onesecond DM-RS port of the second PDCCH may be QCL-ed with the firstreference signal with respect to a first quasi co-location type (e.g.,QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.) indicated by the first antenna port quasico-location property.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI. In an example, the wireless devicemay receive the second PDCCH comprising/including the second DCI for thesearch space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset basedon the first antenna port quasi co-location property of the firstcoreset that the PDCCH order is received. The wireless device maycomplete the random-access procedure based on the receiving the secondPDCCH comprising the second DCI. The second DCI may schedule a PDSCHcomprising a random-access response (e.g., random-access response inFIG. 24) corresponding to the random-access preamble. In an example, thewireless device may complete the random-access procedure based onreceiving random-access response corresponding to the random-accesspreamble. The random-access response corresponding to the random-accesspreamble may comprise that the random-access response may indicate therandom-access preamble (or the random-access preamble index of therandom-access preamble).

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset among thefirst coreset group, the wireless device may not monitor (or startmonitoring), for a second DCI, a second PDCCH in a third coreset (e.g.,Coreset 2, Coreset 4 in FIG. 24) of a second coreset group, of theplurality of coreset groups, that is different from the first coresetgroup that the PDCCH order is received. In an example, based on thedetermining, the wireless device may not monitor, for the second DCI,the second PDCCH in the third coreset of the second coreset group thatis different from the first coreset group. The second DCI may schedulethe PDSCH comprising the random-access response for (or correspondingto) the random-access preamble. The random-access response may be forthe random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambled byan RA-RNTI. The not monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH inthe third coreset of the second coreset group may comprise that thewireless device may not monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH inPDCCH monitoring occasions of/for a search space set associated with (orlinked to) the third coreset. The one or more configuration parametersmay indicate the PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for the search space set.In an example, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In anexample, the search space set may be a common search space set. In anexample, the search space set may be associated with (or linked to) thethird coreset. In an example, the one or more configuration parametersmay indicate a ra-search space (e.g., RA-search space 2 in FIG. 24) forthe search space set of the third coreset (e.g., Coreset 4 in FIG. 24).

FIG. 25 is an example flow diagram of a random-access procedure as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, e.g., from a base station,one or more messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters for a plurality of control resource set(coreset) groups of a cell (e.g., PCell, SCell).

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating/triggering a random-accessprocedure. In an example, the PDCCH order may initiate/trigger therandom-access procedure for the cell. In an example, the PDCCH order mayinitiate/trigger the random-access procedure for a second cell (e.g.,SCell) different from the cell. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order via a first coreset among a first coreset groupof the plurality of coreset groups. In an example, the wireless devicemay initiate the random-access procedure based on the receiving thePDCCH order.

In an example, the wireless device may monitor, for a first DCI, a firstPDCCH in/via the first coreset based on a first antenna port quasico-location property. In an example, the wireless device may receive,via the first coreset, the first PDCCH comprising the first DCI. In anexample, the first DCI may indicate the PDCCH order. In an example, thewireless device may receive/detect the first PDCCH comprising the firstDCI indicating the PDCCH order, via the first coreset, based on thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property. The wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order in/via the first corset based on the firstantenna port quasi co-location property. The receiving/detecting thefirst PDCCH in/via the first coreset based on the first antenna portquasi co-location property may comprise that (the wireless devicedetermines that) the at least one first DM-RS port of the first PDCCHcomprising the first DCI is quasi co-located (QCL-ed) with a firstreference signal indicated by (or in) the first antenna port quasico-location property. The at least one first DM-RS port of the firstPDCCH may be QCL-ed with the first reference signal with respect to afirst quasi co-location type (e.g., QCL TypeD, QCL TypeA, etc.). Thefirst antenna port quasi co-location property may indicate the firstquasi co-location type.

In an example, the wireless device may transmit a random-access preamblefor the random-access procedure. In an example, based on the receivingthe PDCCH order, the wireless device may transmit the random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure.

In an example, based on the transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may determine a second coreset among the first coresetgroup comprising the first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. Inan example, the wireless device may determine the second coreset amongthe first coreset group based on the first coreset group comprising thefirst coreset that the PDCCH order is received. In an example, thewireless device may determine the second coreset among the first coresetgroup based on receiving the PDCCH order via the first coreset in thefirst coreset group.

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset among thefirst coreset group, the wireless device may monitor (or startmonitoring), for a second DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_0), a second PDCCH inthe second coreset of the first coreset group. In an example, the secondDCI may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-access response. Therandom-access response may be for the random-access preamble. A CRC ofthe second DCI may be scrambled by an RNTI. The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI.The monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the secondcoreset of the first coreset group may comprise that the wireless devicemay monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in PDCCH monitoringoccasions of/for a search space set associated with (or linked to) thesecond coreset. In an example, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCHCSS set. In an example, the search space set may be a common searchspace set. In an example, the search space set may be associated with(or linked to) the second coreset. In an example, the one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate a ra-search space for the searchspace set of the second coreset.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH comprising/including the second DCIfor the search space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the secondcoreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. The wireless devicemay complete the random-access procedure based on the receiving thesecond PDCCH comprising the second DCI. The second DCI may schedule aPDSCH comprising a random-access response corresponding to therandom-access preamble. In an example, the wireless device may completethe random-access procedure based on receiving random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise that therandom-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (or therandom-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset among thefirst coreset group, the wireless device may not monitor, for a secondDCI, a second PDCCH in a third coreset of a second coreset group, of theplurality of coreset groups, that is different from the first coresetgroup. In an example, based on the determining, the wireless device maynot monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the third coresetof the second coreset group that is different from the first coresetgroup. The second DCI may schedule the PDSCH comprising therandom-access response for (or corresponding to) the random-accesspreamble. The random-access response may be for the random-accesspreamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambled by an RA-RNTI. Thenot monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in the thirdcoreset of the second coreset group may comprise that the wirelessdevice may not monitor, for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in PDCCHmonitoring occasions of/for a search space set associated with (orlinked to) the third coreset. The one or more configuration parametersmay indicate the PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for the search space set.In an example, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In anexample, the search space set may be a common search space set. In anexample, the search space set may be associated with (or linked to) thethird coreset. In an example, the one or more configuration parametersmay indicate a ra-search space for the search space set of the thirdcoreset.

FIG. 26 is an example flow diagram of a random-access procedure as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, based on the transmitting the random-access preamble (asdiscussed for FIG. 25), the wireless device may determine at least onecoreset among the plurality of coresets. The at least one coreset may beassociated with (or linked to) at least one search space set. In anexample, the at least one search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set.In an example, the at least one search space set may be a common searchspace set. In an example, the one or more configuration parameters mayindicate ra-search space(s) for the at least one search space set. In anexample, at least one coreset may comprise a third coreset (e.g.,Coreset 3 in FIG. 24) and a fourth coreset (e.g., Coreset 4 in FIG. 24).The at least one search space set may comprise a first search space set(e.g., RA-search space 1 in FIG. 24) of the third coreset and a secondsearch space set (e.g., RA-search space 2 in FIG. 24) of the fourthcoreset.

In an example, based on the determining the at least one coreset, thewireless device may determine/select a second coreset among the at leastone coreset and the first coreset group. In an example, the at least onecoreset and the first coreset group may comprise the second coreset.

In an example, based on the determining the at least one coreset, thewireless device may determine/select a second coreset, among the atleast one coreset, that is in the first coreset group comprising thefirst coreset that the PDCCH order is received.

In an example, when the wireless device determines the at least onecoreset, the wireless device may determine the second coreset, among theat least one coreset, that is in the first coreset group based on thefirst coreset group comprising the first coreset that the PDCCH order isreceived. In an example, the wireless device may determine the secondcoreset, among the at least one coreset, that is in the first coresetgroup based on receiving the PDCCH order via the first coreset in thefirst coreset group. In an example, the wireless device may determinethe second coreset among the at least one coreset and the first coresetgroup based on receiving the PDCCH order via the first coreset in thefirst coreset group.

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset, the wirelessdevice may monitor, for a second DCI, a second PDCCH in the secondcoreset. The second DCI may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-accessresponse for (or corresponding to) the random-access preamble. Therandom-access response may be for the random-access preamble. A CRC ofthe second DCI may be scrambled by an RA-RNTI.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI in the second coreset. The wirelessdevice may complete the random-access procedure based on the receivingthe second PDCCH. In an example, the wireless device may complete therandom-access procedure based on receiving random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise that therandom-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (or therandom-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset, the wirelessdevice may not monitor, for a second DCI, a second PDCCH in a thirdcoreset, among the at least one coreset, that is different from thesecond coreset. In an example, the first coreset group comprising thesecond coreset and a second coreset group comprising the third coresetmay be different. The second DCI may schedule the PDSCH comprising therandom-access response for (or corresponding to) the random-accesspreamble. The random-access response may be for the random-accesspreamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambled by an RA-RNTI.

FIG. 27 is an example flow diagram of a random-access procedure as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, a base station may transmit, e.g., to a wireless device,one or more messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters for a plurality of control resource set(coreset) groups of a cell (e.g., PCell, SCell).

In an example, the base station may transmit a physical downlink controlchannel (PDCCH) order initiating/triggering a random-access procedure.In an example, the PDCCH order may initiate/trigger the random-accessprocedure for the cell. In an example, the PDCCH order mayinitiate/trigger the random-access procedure for a second cell (e.g.,SCell) different from the cell. In an example, the base station maytransmit the PDCCH order via a first coreset among a first coreset groupof the plurality of coreset groups.

In an example, the base station may receive a random-access preamble forthe random-access procedure. In an example, based on the transmittingthe PDCCH order, the base station may receive the random-access preamblefor the random-access procedure. In an example, the base station mayreceive, via at least one random-access resource (e.g., PRACH occasion)indicated by the PDCCH order, the random-access preamble for therandom-access procedure.

In an example, based on the receiving the random-access preamble, thebase station may determine a second coreset among the first coresetgroup comprising the first coreset that the PDCCH order is transmitted.In an example, the base station may determine the second coreset amongthe first coreset group based on the first coreset group comprising thefirst coreset that the PDCCH order is transmitted. In an example, thebase station may determine the second coreset among the first coresetgroup based on transmitting the PDCCH order via the first coreset in thefirst coreset group.

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset among thefirst coreset group, the base station may transmit a second PDCCHcomprising a second DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_0) in the second coreset ofthe first coreset group. In an example, the second DCI may schedule aPDSCH comprising a random-access response. The random-access responsemay be for the random-access preamble. A CRC of the second DCI may bescrambled by an RNTI. The RNTI may be an RA-RNTI. The transmitting thesecond PDCCH comprising the second DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_0) in thesecond coreset of the first coreset group may comprise that the basestation transmits the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI (e.g., DCIformat 1_0) in PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for a search space setassociated with (or linked to) the second coreset. In an example, thesearch space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In an example, the searchspace set may be a common search space set. In an example, the searchspace set may be associated with (or linked to) the second coreset. Inan example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate ara-search space for the search space set of the second coreset.

In an example, based on the transmitting the second PDCCH comprising thesecond DCI, the base station may complete the random-access procedure.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. In an example, the wirelessdevice may receive the second PDCCH comprising/including the second DCIfor the search space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the secondcoreset based on the first antenna port quasi co-location property ofthe first coreset that the PDCCH order is received. The wireless devicemay complete the random-access procedure based on the receiving thesecond PDCCH comprising the second DCI. The second DCI may schedule aPDSCH comprising a random-access response corresponding to therandom-access preamble. In an example, the wireless device may completethe random-access procedure based on receiving random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise that therandom-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (or therandom-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset among thefirst coreset group, the base station may not transmit a second PDCCHcomprising a second DCI in a third coreset of a second coreset group, ofthe plurality of coreset groups, that is different from the firstcoreset group. In an example, based on the determining, the base stationmay not transmit the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI in the thirdcoreset of the second coreset group that is different from the firstcoreset group. The second DCI may schedule the PDSCH comprising therandom-access response for (or corresponding to) the random-accesspreamble. The random-access response may be for the random-accesspreamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambled by an RA-RNTI. Thenot transmitting the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI in the thirdcoreset of the second coreset group may comprise that the base stationmay not transmit the second PDCCH comprising the second DCI in PDCCHmonitoring occasions of/for a search space set associated with (orlinked to) the third coreset. The one or more configuration parametersmay indicate the PDCCH monitoring occasions of/for the search space set.In an example, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set. In anexample, the search space set may be a common search space set. In anexample, the search space set may be associated with (or linked to) thethird coreset. In an example, the one or more configuration parametersmay indicate a ra-search space for the search space set of the thirdcoreset.

FIG. 28 is an example flow diagram of a random-access procedure as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, e.g., from a base station,one or more messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters for a plurality of coreset groups of a cell(e.g., PCell, SCell, SpCell). In FIG. 28, the plurality of coresetgroups may comprise a first coreset group (e.g., Coreset group 1) and asecond coreset group (e.g., Coreset group 2). The plurality of coresetgroups may comprise a plurality of coresets (e.g., Coreset 1, Coreset 2,Coreset 3 and Coreset 4 in FIG. 28). The first coreset group maycomprise one or more first coresets (e.g., Coreset 1 and Coreset 3 inFIG. 28) of the plurality of coresets. The second coreset group maycomprise one or more second coresets (e.g., Coreset 2 and Coreset 4 inFIG. 28) of the plurality of coresets.

In an example, the wireless device may receive a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating/triggering a random-accessprocedure. In an example, the PDCCH order may initiate/trigger therandom-access procedure for the cell. In an example, the PDCCH order mayinitiate/trigger the random-access procedure for a second cell (e.g.,SCell) different from the cell. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive the PDCCH order via a first coreset among a first coreset groupof the plurality of coreset groups. In an example, the wireless devicemay initiate the random-access procedure based on the receiving thePDCCH order.

In an example, the PDCCH order may comprise at least one of: randomaccess preamble index, supplementary uplink (SUL) indicator, SSB index,RACH occasion index. The random access preamble index may indicate arandom access preamble to use in the random access procedure. The SULindicator may indicate whether to transmit the random access preamble onan SUL carrier or a normal uplink carrier (e.g., NUL). The SSB index mayindicate an indicated SSB index to identify a group of RACH occasions.The RACH occasion index may indicate a relative RACH occasion index thatcorresponds to the indicated SSB index.

In an example, a PDCCH order may comprise a new index (e.g., Coresetgroup index, TRP, index, antenna panel index, SRS resource set index,etc.). The new index may indicate a second coreset group of theplurality of coreset groups. In an example, the second coreset group andthe first coreset group that the PDCCH order is received may be thesame. In FIG. 28, the first coreset group may be Coreset group 1 and thesecond coreset group may be Coreset group 1. The first coreset group maybe Coreset group 2 and the second coreset group may be Coreset group 2.In an example, the second coreset group and the first coreset group thatthe PDCCH order is received may be different. In FIG. 28, the firstcoreset group may be Coreset group 2 and the second coreset group may beCoreset group 1. The first coreset group may be Coreset group 1 and thesecond coreset group may be Coreset group 2.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatecoreset group indices for the plurality of coresets. In an example, eachcoreset of the plurality of coresets may be identified by a respectivecoreset group index of the coreset group indices. In an example, a firstcoreset (e.g., Coreset 1, Coreset 3 in Coreset group 1) of the firstcoreset group may be identified by a first coreset group index of thecoreset group indices. In an example, a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2,Coreset 4 in Coreset group 2) of the second coreset group may beidentified by a second coreset group index of the coreset group indices.

In an example, the new index indicating the second coreset group maycomprise that a value of the new index is equal to (or same as) acoreset group index of a coreset in the second coreset group. Forexample, in FIG. 28, when the second coreset group is Coreset group 1,the coreset group index may be equal to the first coreset group index.The coreset group index may be equal to the first coreset group index ofthe first coreset (e.g., Coreset 1, Coreset 3 in Coreset group 1) in thefirst coreset group (e.g., Coreset group 1). When the second coresetgroup is Coreset group 1, the coreset may be the first coreset (e.g.,Coreset 1, Coreset 3). For example, in FIG. 28, when the second coresetgroup is Coreset group 2, the coreset group index may be equal to thesecond coreset group index. The coreset group index may be equal to thesecond coreset group index of the second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2,Coreset 4 in Coreset group 2) in the second coreset group (e.g., Coresetgroup 2). When the second coreset group is Coreset group 2, the coresetmay be the second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2, Coreset 4).

In an example, the plurality of coreset groups may be identified by (orassociated with) group indices. In an example, each coreset group of theplurality of coreset groups may be identified by a respective groupindex of the group indices. In an example, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate the group indices for the plurality of coresetgroups. In an example, the first coreset group may be identified by (orassociated with) a first group index of the group indices. The secondcoreset group may be identified by (or associated with) a second groupindex of the group indices.

In an example, the new index indicating the second coreset group maycomprise that a value of the new index is equal to (or the same as) agroup index of the second coreset group. For example, in FIG. 28, whenthe second coreset group is Coreset group 1, the group index may beequal to the first group index of the first coreset group (e.g., Coresetgroup 1). For example, in FIG. 28, when the second coreset group isCoreset group 2, the group index may be equal to the second group indexof the second coreset group (e.g., Coreset group 2).

In an example, the new index indicating the second coreset group maycomprise that a value of the new index is equal to (or the same as) aTRP index of a TRP transmitting a downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDSCH,PDCCH, DCI) via the second coreset group. In an example, the TRP may nottransmit a downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via a firstcoreset group, of the plurality of coreset groups, different from thesecond coreset group. For example, in FIG. 28, when the second coresetgroup is Coreset group 1, the TRP index may be equal to a first TRPindex of a first TRP (e.g., TRP 1 in FIG. 28) of a plurality of TRPs.For example, in FIG. 28, when the second coreset group is Coreset group2, the TRP index may be equal to a second TRP index of a second TRP(e.g., TRP 2 in FIG. 28) of a plurality of TRPs.

In an example, the wireless device may be equipped with a plurality ofantenna panels (e.g., Panel 1 and Panel 2 in FIG. 28).

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatepanel indices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter) for theplurality of antenna panels. In an example, each antenna panel of theplurality of antenna panels may be identified by a respective one panelindex of the panel indices. In an example, a first antenna panel (e.g.,Panel 1 in FIG. 28) of the plurality of antenna panels may be identifiedby a first panel index. In an example, a second antenna panel (e.g.,Panel 2 in FIG. 28) of the plurality of antenna panels may be identifiedby a second panel index.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicate oneor more sounding reference signal (SRS) resource sets for the cell(e.g., by a higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceSet). In an example, theone or more configuration parameters may indicate srs resource setindices (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceSetId)for the one or more SRS resource sets. In an example, each SRS resourceset of the one or more SRS resource sets may be identified by arespective one srs resource set index of the srs resource set indices.In an example, a first SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resourcesets may be identified by a first srs resource set index. In an example,a second SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may beidentified by a second srs resource set index.

In an example, the wireless device may perform/determine a first SRStransmission for the first SRS resource set via a first antenna panel(e.g., Panel 1 in FIG. 28) of the plurality of antenna panels. In anexample, the wireless device may perform/determine a second SRStransmission for the second SRS resource set via a second antenna panel(e.g., Panel 2 in FIG. 28) of the plurality of antenna panels. In anexample, each SRS resource set may be associated with one antenna panelof the plurality of antenna panels. In an example, the first srsresource set index may identify the first antenna panel. In an example,the second srs resource set index may identify the second antenna panel.In an example, the first panel index and the first srs resource setindex may be the same. In an example, the second panel index and thesecond srs resource set index may be the same. In an example, eachantenna panel of the plurality of antenna panels may be identified by arespective one srs resource set index of the srs resource set indices.

In an example, the new index indicating the second coreset group maycomprise that a value of the new index is equal to (or the same as) apanel index of an antenna panel, of the plurality of antenna panels,that is used to receive a downlink signal/channel (e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH,DCI) via the second coreset group. In an example, the wireless devicemay use the first antenna panel (e.g., Panel 1) to receive via the firstcoreset group (e.g., Coreset group 1). The receiving via the firstcoreset group may comprise receiving via a coreset (e.g., Coreset 1,Coreset 3 in FIG. 28) among the first coreset group. In an example, thewireless device may use the second antenna panel (e.g., Panel 2) toreceive via the second coreset group (e.g., Coreset group 2). Thereceiving via the second coreset group may comprise receiving via acoreset (e.g., Coreset 2, Coreset 4 in FIG. 28) among the second coresetgroup. For example, in FIG. 28, when the second coreset group is Coresetgroup 1, the panel index may be equal to a first panel index of a firstantenna panel (e.g., Panel 1 in FIG. 28) of the plurality of antennapanels. For example, in FIG. 28, when the second coreset group isCoreset group 2, the panel index may be equal to a second panel index ofa second antenna panel (e.g., Panel 2 in FIG. 28) of the plurality ofantenna panels.

In an example, the new index indicating the second coreset group maycomprise that a value of the new index is equal to (or the same as) aSRS resource set index of (or indicating or identifying) an antennapanel, of the plurality of antenna panels, that is used to receive adownlink signal/channel (e.g., PDSCH, PDCCH, DCI) via the second coresetgroup. For example, in FIG. 28, when the second coreset group is Coresetgroup 1, the SRS resource set index may be equal to a first SRS resourceset index of a first antenna panel (e.g., Panel 1 in FIG. 28) of theplurality of antenna panels. For example, in FIG. 28, when the secondcoreset group is Coreset group 2, the SRS resource set index may beequal to a second SRS resource set index of a second antenna panel(e.g., Panel 2 in FIG. 28) of the plurality of antenna panels.

In an example, the wireless device may transmit a random-access preamblefor the random-access procedure. In an example, based on the receivingthe PDCCH order, the wireless device may transmit the random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure.

In an example, the wireless device may transmit the random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure via the antenna panel indicatedby the new index (e.g., panel index of the antenna panel, SRS resourceset index of the antenna panel).

In an example, based on the transmitting the random-access preamble, thewireless device may determine a second coreset (e.g., Coreset 2 andCoreset 4 in FIG. 28) among the second coreset group (e.g., Coresetgroup 2 in FIG. 28) indicated by the new index in the PDCCH order.

In an example, based on the determining the second coreset among thesecond coreset group indicated by the new index in the PDCCH order, thewireless device may monitor (or start monitoring), for a second DCI(e.g., DCI format 1_0), a second PDCCH in the second coreset. In anexample, the second DCI may schedule a PDSCH comprising a random-accessresponse. The random-access response may be for the random-accesspreamble. A CRC of the second DCI may be scrambled by an RNTI. The RNTImay be an RA-RNTI. The monitoring, for the second DCI, the second PDCCHin the second coreset may comprise that the wireless device may monitor,for the second DCI, the second PDCCH in PDCCH monitoring occasionsof/for a search space set associated with (or linked to) the secondcoreset. In an example, the search space set may be Type1-PDCCH CSS set.In an example, the search space set may be a common search space set. Inan example, the search space set may be associated with (or linked to)the second coreset. In an example, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate a ra-search space for the search space set ofthe second coreset. In an example, the wireless device may determine thesecond coreset among the second coreset group based on the secondcoreset being associated with (or linked to) the search space set.

In an example, the wireless device may receive the second PDCCHcomprising/including the second DCI for the search space set (e.g.,Type1-PDCCH CSS set) in the second coreset. The wireless device maycomplete the random-access procedure based on the receiving the secondPDCCH comprising the second DCI. The second DCI may schedule a PDSCHcomprising a random-access response corresponding to the random-accesspreamble. In an example, the wireless device may complete therandom-access procedure based on receiving random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble. The random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble may comprise that therandom-access response may indicate the random-access preamble (or therandom-access preamble index of the random-access preamble).

According to various embodiments, a device such as, for example, awireless device, off-network wireless device, a base station, and/or thelike, may comprise one or more processors and memory. The memory maystore instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors,cause the device to perform a series of actions. Embodiments of exampleactions are illustrated in the accompanying figures and specification.Features from various embodiments may be combined to create yet furtherembodiments.

FIG. 29 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure. At 2910, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, an order fortransmitting a preamble via a second cell. At 2920, a determination maybe made that the first cell is different from the second cell. At 2930,the wireless device may receive, via a second coreset of the secondcell, a downlink control information (DCI) for a response to thepreamble. The receiving of the DCI may be based on a transmissionconfiguration indicator (TCI) state of the second coreset in response tothe first cell being different from the second cell.

FIG. 30 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure. At 3010, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, an order fortransmitting a preamble via a second cell. At 3020, the wireless devicemay receive, via a second coreset of the second cell, a downlink controlinformation DCI for a response to the preamble. At 3030, a determinationmay be made that the first cell is different from the second cell. At3040, the wireless device may receive the response. The receiving of theresponse may be based on a transmission configuration indicator (TCI)state of the second coreset in response to the first cell beingdifferent from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, a physicaldownlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-accessprocedure for a second cell. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may transmit, via the second cell, a random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure. The wireless device mayreceive, via a second coreset of the second cell, a downlink controlinformation scheduling a random-access response corresponding to therandom-access preamble. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the downlink control information may be based on a firsttransmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the first coreset inresponse to the first cell being same as the second cell. According toan example embodiment, the receiving of the downlink control informationmay be based on a second TCI state of the second coreset in response tothe first cell being different from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, an order fortransmitting a preamble via a second cell. The wireless device mayreceive, via a second coreset of the second cell, a downlink controlinformation (DCI) for a response to the preamble. According to anexample embodiment, the receiving of the DCI may be based on atransmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the first coreset inresponse to the first cell being same as the second cell. According toan example embodiment, the receiving of the DCI may be based on a TCIstate of the second coreset in response to the first cell beingdifferent from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the order may be a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-access procedure forthe second cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay transmit, via the second cell, the preamble for the random-accessprocedure. According to an example embodiment, the response may be arandom-access response corresponding to the preamble.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, an order fortransmitting a preamble via a second cell. The wireless device mayreceive, via a second coreset of the second cell, a downlink controlinformation (DCI) for a response to the preamble. According to anexample embodiment, the receiving of the DCI may be based on atransmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the second coresetin response to the first cell being different from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive, viathe first coreset, a second order for transmitting a second preamble viaa third cell. The wireless device may receive, via a third coreset ofthe third cell, a second DCI for a second response to the secondpreamble. According to an example embodiment, the receiving of thesecond DCI may be based on a TCI state of the first coreset in responseto the first cell being same as the third cell.

According to an example embodiment, the order may be a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-access procedure forthe second cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay transmit, via the second cell, the preamble for the random-accessprocedure. According to an example embodiment, the response may be arandom-access response corresponding to the preamble. According to anexample embodiment, the wireless device may monitoring a PDCCH in thefirst coreset based on the TCI state of the first coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the PDCCH order viathe first coreset may be based on the TCI state of the first coreset.According to an example embodiment, the receiving, via the secondcoreset, of the downlink control information based on the TCI state ofthe second coreset may comprise at least one demodulation referencesignal (DM-RS) port of a PDCCH with the downlink control informationreceived in the second coreset being quasi co-located with a secondreference signal indicated by the TCI state of the second coreset.According to an example embodiment, the TCI state of the second coresetmay indicate a second quasi co-location type. According to an exampleembodiment, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH being quasico-located with the second reference signal may comprise the at leastone DM-RS port of the PDCCH being quasi co-located with the secondreference signal with respect to the second quasi co-location type.According to an example embodiment, the receiving, via the secondcoreset, of the downlink control information based on the TCI state ofthe first coreset may comprise at least one DM-RS port of a PDCCH withthe downlink control information received in the second coreset beingquasi co-located with a first reference signal indicated by the TCIstate of the first coreset. According to an example embodiment, the TCIstate of the first coreset may indicate a first quasi co-location type.According to an example embodiment, the at least one DM-RS port of thePDCCH being quasi co-located with the first reference signal maycomprise the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH being quasi co-locatedwith the first reference signal with respect to the first quasico-location type.

According to an example embodiment, the downlink control information maybe addressed to a random-access RNTI (RA-RNTI).

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive therandom-access response. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the random-access response may be based on the TCI state ofthe first coreset of the first coreset in response to the first cellbeing same as the second cell. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the random-access response may be based on the TCI state ofthe second coreset in response to the first cell being different fromthe second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may complete therandom-access procedure based on receiving the random-access responsecorresponding to the preamble. According to an example embodiment, thedownlink control information may schedule a physical downlink sharedchannel (PDSCH) that comprises the random-access response correspondingto the preamble. According to an example embodiment, the receiving ofthe random-access response may comprise receiving the PDSCH thatcomprises the random-access response corresponding to the preamble.According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the random-accessresponse based on the TCI state of the second coreset may comprise atleast one DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasi co-located with a secondreference signal indicated by the TCI state of the second coreset.According to an example embodiment, the TCI state of the second coresetmay indicate a second quasi co-location type. According to an exampleembodiment, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasico-located with the second reference signal may comprise the at leastone DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasi co-located with the secondreference signal with respect to the second quasi co-location type.According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the random-accessresponse based on the TCI state of the first coreset may comprise atleast one DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasi co-located with a firstreference signal indicated by the TCI state of the first coreset.According to an example embodiment, the TCI state of the first coresetmay indicate a first quasi co-location type. According to an exampleembodiment, the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasico-located with the first reference signal may comprise the at least oneDM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasi co-located with the first referencesignal with respect to the first quasi co-location type.

According to an example embodiment, the TCI state of the first coresetmay be a first DM-RS antenna port quasi co-location. According to anexample embodiment, the TCI state of the second coreset may be a secondDM-RS antenna port quasi co-location.

According to an example embodiment, the first cell may be a secondarycell. According to an example embodiment, the second cell may be aprimary cell.

According to an example embodiment, the random-access procedure may be acontention-free random-access procedure.

According to an example embodiment, the PDCCH order may comprise a fieldindicating a second cell index of the second cell. According to anexample embodiment, the second cell being different from the first cellmay comprise the second cell index of the second cell being differentfrom a first cell index of the first cell.

According to an example embodiment, the transmitting the preamble maycomprise transmitting a random-access preamble via an active uplinkbandwidth part (BWP) of the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive oneor more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters.According to an example embodiment, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate a search space set for the second coreset.According to an example embodiment, the search space set may be a Type 1PDCCH common search space (CSS) set. According to an example embodiment,the one or more configuration parameters may indicate the TCI state forthe second coreset. According to an example embodiment, the one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate the second coreset for an activedownlink BWP of the second cell. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may receive an activation command activating the TCIstate of the second coreset.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, a physicaldownlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-accessprocedure for a second cell. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may transmit, via the second cell, a random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may monitor, for a downlink controlinformation scheduling a random-access response corresponding to therandom-access preamble, a second coreset of the second cell. Accordingto an example embodiment, the monitoring the second coreset may be basedon a first transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the firstcoreset in response to the first cell being same as the second cell.According to an example embodiment, the monitoring the second coresetmay be based on a second TCI state of the second coreset in response tothe first cell being different from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive thedownlink control information, According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the downlink control information may be based on the firstTCI state of the first coreset in response to the first cell being sameas the second cell. According to an example embodiment, the receiving ofthe downlink control information may be based on the second TCI state ofthe second coreset in response to the first cell being different fromthe second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive therandom-access response. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the random-access response may be based on the first TCIstate of the first coreset in response to the first cell being same asthe second cell. According to an example embodiment, the receiving ofthe random-access response may be based on the second TCI state of thesecond coreset in response to the first cell being different from thesecond cell.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive amedium access control control element (MAC CE) indicating activation ofa transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state for a controlresource set (coreset) of a first cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive, via a second cell, aphysical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating arandom-access procedure for the first cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may transmit, via the first cell, arandom-access preamble for the random-access procedure. According to anexample embodiment, the wireless device may monitor, for a downlinkcontrol information scheduling a random-access response corresponding tothe random-access preamble, the coreset, According to an exampleembodiment, in response to the first cell being different from thesecond cell, the monitoring the coreset may be based on the TCI state ofthe coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive thedownlink control information based on the TCI state of the coreset inresponse to the first cell being different from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive therandom-access response based on the TCI state of the coreset in responseto the first cell being different from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive amedium access control control element (MAC CE) indicating activation ofa transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state for a controlresource set (coreset) of a first cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive, via a second cell, an orderfor transmitting a preamble via the first cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may monitor the coreset for a downlinkcontrol information corresponding to a response to the preamble.According to an example embodiment, in response to the first cell beingdifferent from the second cell, the monitoring the coreset may be basedon the TCI state of the coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the order may be a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-access procedure forthe second cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay transmit, via the first cell, the preamble for the random-accessprocedure. According to an example embodiment, the response may be arandom-access response corresponding to the preamble.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive amedium access control control element (MAC CE) indicating activation ofa transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state for a controlresource set (coreset) of a first cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive, via a second cell, an orderfor transmitting a preamble via the first cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive, via the coreset, a downlinkcontrol information (DCI) corresponding to a response to the preamble.According to an example embodiment, in response to the first cell beingdifferent from the second cell, the receiving of the DCI may be based onthe TCI state of the coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the order may be a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-access procedure forthe second cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay transmit, via the first cell, the preamble for the random-accessprocedure. According to an example embodiment, the response may be arandom-access response corresponding to the preamble.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst cell, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiatinga random-access procedure for a second cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may transmit, via the second cell, arandom-access preamble for the random-access procedure. According to anexample embodiment, the wireless device may determine whether the firstcell and the second cell are the same. According to an exampleembodiment, in response to the determination that the first cell isdifferent from the second cell, the wireless device may monitor, for adownlink control information scheduling a random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble, a control resource set(coreset) of the second cell based on a transmission configurationindicator (TCI) state of the coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive thedownlink control information based on the TCI state of the coreset inresponse to the determination that the first cell is different from thesecond cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive therandom-access response based on the TCI state of the coreset in responseto the determination that the first cell is different from the secondcell.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) with a first coreset group index, aphysical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating arandom-access procedure. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may transmit a random-access preamble for therandom-access procedure. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may receive, via a second coreset with a second coresetgroup index, a downlink control information scheduling a random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble. According to anexample embodiment, the receiving of the downlink control informationmay be based on a first transmission configuration indicator (TCI) stateof the first coreset in response to the first coreset group index beingsame as the second coreset group index. According to an exampleembodiment, the receiving of the downlink control information may bebased on a second TCI state of the second coreset in response to thefirst coreset group index being different from the second coreset groupindex.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive oneor more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters for acell. According to an example embodiment, the one or more configurationparameters may indicate the first coreset and the second coreset for anactive downlink bandwidth part (BWP) of the cell. According to anexample embodiment, the one or more configuration parameters mayindicate the first coreset group index for the first coreset. Accordingto an example embodiment, the one or more configuration parameters mayindicate the second coreset group index for the second coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the random-access procedure may befor a cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless device maymonitor a PDCCH in the first coreset based on the first TCI state.According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the PDCCH order viathe first coreset may be based on the first TCI state.

According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the downlinkcontrol information based on the second TCI state may comprise at leastone demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) port of a PDCCH with thedownlink control information received in the second coreset being quasico-located with a second reference signal indicated by the second TCIstate. According to an example embodiment, the second TCI state mayindicate a second quasi co-location type.

According to an example embodiment, the at least one DM-RS port of thePDCCH being quasi co-located with the second reference signal maycomprise the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH being quasi co-locatedwith the second reference signal with respect to the second quasico-location type. According to an example embodiment, the receiving ofthe downlink control information based on the first TCI state maycomprise at least one DM-RS port of a PDCCH with the downlink controlinformation received in the second coreset being quasi co-located with afirst reference signal indicated by the first TCI state. According to anexample embodiment, the first TCI state may indicate a first quasico-location type. According to an example embodiment, the at least oneDM-RS port of the PDCCH being quasi co-located with the first referencesignal may comprise the at least one DM-RS port of the PDCCH being quasico-located with the first reference signal with respect to the firstquasi co-location type.

According to an example embodiment, the downlink control information maybe addressed to a random-access RNTI (RA-RNTI).

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive therandom-access response. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the random-access response may be based on the first TCIstate of the first coreset in response to the first coreset group indexbeing same as the second coreset group index. According to an exampleembodiment, the receiving of the random-access response may be thesecond TCI state of the second coreset in response to the first coresetgroup index being different from the second coreset group index.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may complete therandom-access procedure based on receiving the random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble.

According to an example embodiment, the downlink control information mayschedule a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that comprises therandom-access response corresponding to the random-access preamble.According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the random-accessresponse may comprise receiving the PDSCH that comprises therandom-access response corresponding to the random-access preamble.According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the random-accessresponse based on the second TCI state may comprise at least one DM-RSport of the PDSCH being quasi co-located with a second reference signalindicated by the second TCI state. According to an example embodiment,the second TCI state may indicate a second quasi co-location type.According to an example embodiment, the at least one DM-RS port of thePDSCH being quasi co-located with the second reference signal maycomprise the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasi co-locatedwith the second reference signal with respect to the second quasico-location type. According to an example embodiment, the receiving ofthe random-access response based on the first TCI state may comprise atleast one DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasi co-located with a firstreference signal indicated by the first TCI state. According to anexample embodiment, the first TCI state may indicate a first quasico-location type. According to an example embodiment, the at least oneDM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasi co-located with the first referencesignal may comprise the at least one DM-RS port of the PDSCH being quasico-located with the first reference signal with respect to the firstquasi co-location type.

According to an example embodiment, the first TCI state may be a firstDM-RS antenna port quasi co-location. According to an exampleembodiment, the second TCI state may be a second DM-RS antenna portquasi co-location.

According to an example embodiment, the random-access procedure may be acontention-free random-access procedure.

According to an example embodiment, the PDCCH order may comprise a fieldthat is equal to the second coreset group index. According to an exampleembodiment, the receiving via the second coreset with the second coresetgroup index may be based on the PDCCH order comprising the field that isequal to the second coreset group index. According to an exampleembodiment, the PDCCH order may comprise a field that is equal to anindex of a transmission and reception point (TRP) associated with thesecond coreset group index. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may monitor, for the downlink control information, thesecond coreset with the second coreset group index based on the PDCCHorder comprising the field that is equal to the index of the TRPassociated with the second coreset group index. According to an exampleembodiment, the TRP being associated with the second coreset group indexmay comprise the TRP transmitting, via one or more coresets with thesecond coreset group index, one or more DCIs. According to an exampleembodiment, the one or more coresets may comprise the second coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the PDCCH order may comprise a fieldthat is equal to an index of an antenna panel of a plurality of antennapanels at the wireless device. According to an example embodiment, theantenna panel may be associated with the second coreset group index.According to an example embodiment, the antenna panel being associatedwith the second coreset group index may comprise receiving, via theantenna panel, one or more DCIs via one or more coresets with the secondcoreset group index. According to an example embodiment, the one or morecoresets may comprise the second coreset. According to an exampleembodiment, the transmitting the random-access preamble may comprise thetransmitting the random-access preamble via the antenna panel.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) with a first coreset group index, aphysical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating arandom-access procedure. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may transmit a random-access preamble for therandom-access procedure. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may monitor, for downlink control information schedulinga random-access response corresponding to the random-access preamble, asecond coreset with a second coreset group index. According to anexample embodiment, the monitoring the second coreset may be based on afirst transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the firstcoreset in response to the first coreset group index being same as thesecond coreset group index. According to an example embodiment, themonitoring the second coreset may be based on a second TCI state of thesecond coreset in response to the first coreset group index beingdifferent from the second coreset group index.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive thedownlink control information. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the downlink control information may be based on the firstTCI state of the first coreset in response to the first coreset groupindex being same as the second coreset group index. According to anexample embodiment, the receiving of the downlink control informationmay be based on the second TCI state of the second coreset in responseto the first coreset group index being different from the second coresetgroup index.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive therandom-access response. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the random-access response may be based on the first TCIstate of the first coreset in response to the first coreset group indexbeing same as the second coreset group index. According to an exampleembodiment, the receiving of the random-access response may be based onthe second TCI state of the second coreset in response to the firstcoreset group index being different from the second coreset group index.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) with a first coreset group index, aphysical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating arandom-access procedure. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may transmit a random-access preamble for therandom-access procedure. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may monitor, for a downlink control informationscheduling a random-access response corresponding to the random-accesspreamble, a second coreset with a second coreset group index. Accordingto an example embodiment, the wireless device may determine whether thefirst coreset group index and the second coreset group index are thesame. According to an example embodiment, in response to thedetermination that the first coreset group index is different from thesecond coreset group index, the wireless device may receive, via thesecond coreset, the downlink control information based on a transmissionconfiguration indicator (TCI) state of the second coreset.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive,based on the TCI state of the second coreset, the random-access responsein response to the determination that the first coreset group index isdifferent from the second coreset group index.

According to an example embodiment, a base station may transmit, via afirst control resource set (coreset) with a first coreset group index, aphysical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating arandom-access procedure. According to an example embodiment, the basestation may receive a random-access preamble for the random-accessprocedure. According to an example embodiment, the base station maydetermine a second coreset with a coreset group index that is the sameas the first coreset group index of the first coreset. According to anexample embodiment, the base station may transmit, via the secondcoreset, a downlink control information (DCI) scheduling a random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble.

According to an example embodiment, the first coreset and the secondcoreset may be different. According to an example embodiment, the firstcoreset and the second coreset may be the same.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may determine athird coreset with a coreset group index that is different from thefirst coreset group index of the first coreset. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may not transmit, via the third coreset,a downlink control information (DCI) scheduling a random-access responsecorresponding to the random-access preamble.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, a physicaldownlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-accessprocedure for a second cell. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may transmit, via the second cell, a random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive, via a second coreset of thesecond cell, a downlink control information scheduling a random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble. According to anexample embodiment, the wireless device may receive the random-accessresponse. According to an example embodiment, the receiving of therandom-access response may be based on a first transmissionconfiguration indicator (TCI) state of the first coreset in response tothe first cell being same as the second cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the receiving of the random-access response may be based ona second TCI state of the second coreset in response to the first cellbeing different from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, an order fortransmitting a preamble via a second cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive, via a second coreset of thesecond cell, a downlink control information for a response to thepreamble. According to an example embodiment, the wireless device mayreceive the response. According to an example embodiment, the receivingof the response may be based on a transmission configuration indicator(TCI) state of the first coreset in response to the first cell beingsame as the second cell. According to an example embodiment, thereceiving of the response may be based on a TCI state of the secondcoreset in response to the first cell being different from the secondcell.

According to an example embodiment, the order may be a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-access procedure forthe second cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay transmit, via the second cell, the preamble for the random-accessprocedure. According to an example embodiment, the response may be arandom-access response corresponding to the preamble.

According to an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive, via afirst control resource set (coreset) of a first cell, an order fortransmitting a preamble via a second cell. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive, via a second coreset of thesecond cell, a downlink control information for a response to thepreamble. According to an example embodiment, the wireless device mayreceive the response. According to an example embodiment, the receivingof the response may be based on a transmission configuration indicator(TCI) state of the second coreset in response to the first cell beingdifferent from the second cell.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive, viathe first coreset, a second order for transmitting a second preamble viaa third cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay receive, via a third coreset of the third cell, a second DCI for asecond response to the second preamble. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may receive the second response.According to an example embodiment, the receiving of the second responsemay be based on a TCI state of the first coreset in response to thefirst cell being same as the third cell.

According to an example embodiment, the order may be a physical downlinkcontrol channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-access procedure forthe second cell. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay transmit, via the second cell, the preamble for the random-accessprocedure. According to an example embodiment, the response may be arandom-access response corresponding to the preamble.

What is claimed is:
 1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wirelessdevice and via a first control resource set (coreset) with a firstcoreset group index, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) orderinitiating a random-access procedure; transmitting a random-accesspreamble for the random-access procedure; and receiving, via a secondcoreset with a second coreset group index, a downlink controlinformation (DCI) scheduling a random-access response corresponding tothe random-access preamble, wherein the receiving the DCI is based on: afirst transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the firstcoreset in response to the first coreset group index being same as thesecond coreset group index; and a second TCI state of the second coresetin response to the first coreset group index being different from thesecond coreset group index.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein therandom-access procedure is for a cell.
 3. The method of claim 1, furthercomprising monitoring a PDCCH in the first coreset based on the firstTCI state.
 4. The method of claim 3, wherein the receiving the PDCCHorder via the first coreset is based on the first TCI state.
 5. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the receiving the DCI based on the second TCIstate comprises at least one demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) portof a PDCCH with the DCI received in the second coreset being quasico-located with a second reference signal indicated by the second TCIstate.
 6. The method of claim 1, wherein the receiving the DCI based onthe first TCI state comprises at least one DM-RS port of a PDCCH withthe DCI received in the second coreset being quasi co-located with afirst reference signal indicated by the first TCI state.
 7. The methodof claim 1, further comprising receiving the random-access response,wherein the receiving the random-access response is based on: the firstTCI state of the first coreset in response to the first coreset groupindex being same as the second coreset group index; and the second TCIstate of the second coreset in response to the first coreset group indexbeing different from the second coreset group index.
 8. The method ofclaim 1, further comprising: receiving one or more messages comprisingone or more configuration parameters for a cell.
 9. The method of claim8, wherein the one or more configuration parameters indicate the firstcoreset and the second coreset for an active downlink bandwidth part(BWP) of the cell.
 10. The method of claim 8, wherein the one or moreconfiguration parameters indicate: the first coreset group index for thefirst coreset; and the second coreset group index for the secondcoreset.
 11. A wireless device comprising: one or more processors; andmemory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or moreprocessors, cause the wireless device to: receive, via a first controlresource set (coreset) with a first coreset group index, a physicaldownlink control channel (PDCCH) order initiating a random-accessprocedure; transmit a random-access preamble for the random-accessprocedure; and receive, via a second coreset with a second coreset groupindex, a downlink control information (DCI) scheduling a random-accessresponse corresponding to the random-access preamble, wherein thereception of the DCI is based on: a first transmission configurationindicator (TCI) state of the first coreset in response to the firstcoreset group index being same as the second coreset group index; and asecond TCI state of the second coreset in response to the first coresetgroup index being different from the second coreset group index.
 12. Thewireless device of claim 11, wherein the random-access procedure is fora cell.
 13. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the instructionsfurther cause the wireless device to monitor a PDCCH in the firstcoreset based on the first TCI state.
 14. The wireless device of claim13, wherein the reception of the PDCCH order via the first coreset isbased on the first TCI state.
 15. The wireless device of claim 11,wherein the reception of the DCI based on the second TCI state comprisesat least one demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) port of a PDCCH withthe DCI received in the second coreset being quasi co-located with asecond reference signal indicated by the second TCI state.
 16. Thewireless device of claim 11, wherein the reception of the DCI based onthe first TCI state comprises at least one DM-RS port of a PDCCH withthe DCI received in the second coreset being quasi co-located with afirst reference signal indicated by the first TCI state.
 17. Thewireless device of claim 11, wherein the instructions further cause thewireless device to receive the random-access response, wherein thereception of the random-access response is based on: the first TCI stateof the first coreset in response to the first coreset group index beingsame as the second coreset group index; and the second TCI state of thesecond coreset in response to the first coreset group index beingdifferent from the second coreset group index.
 18. The wireless deviceof claim 11, wherein the instructions further cause the wireless deviceto receive one or more messages comprising one or more configurationparameters, for a cell, indicating: the first coreset group index forthe first coreset; and the second coreset group index for the secondcoreset.
 19. The wireless device of claim 18, wherein the one or moreconfiguration parameters indicate the first coreset and the secondcoreset for an active downlink bandwidth part (BWP) of the cell.
 20. Asystem comprising: a base station comprising: one or more firstprocessors; and first memory storing first instructions that, whenexecuted by the one or more first processors, cause the base station to:transmit, via a first control resource set (coreset) with a firstcoreset group index, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) orderinitiating a random-access procedure; receive a random-access preamblefor the random-access procedure; and transmit, via a second coreset witha second coreset group index, a downlink control information (DCI)scheduling a random-access response corresponding to the random-accesspreamble, wherein the transmission of the DCI is based on: a firsttransmission configuration indicator (TCI) state of the first coreset inresponse to the first coreset group index being same as the secondcoreset group index; and a second TCI state of the second coreset inresponse to the first coreset group index being different from thesecond coreset group index; and a wireless device comprising: one ormore second processors; and second memory storing second instructionsthat, when executed by the one or more second processors, cause thewireless device to: receive, via the first coreset with the firstcoreset group index, the PDCCH order initiating the random-accessprocedure; transmit the random-access preamble for the random-accessprocedure; and receive, via the second coreset with the second coresetgroup index, the DCI scheduling the random-access response correspondingto the random-access preamble, wherein the reception of the DCI is basedon: the first TCI state of the first coreset in response to the firstcoreset group index being same as the second coreset group index; andthe second TCI state of the second coreset in response to the firstcoreset group index being different from the second coreset group index.